WO2018116981A1 - Cover member, manufacturing method therefor, and mobile information terminal - Google Patents

Cover member, manufacturing method therefor, and mobile information terminal Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018116981A1
WO2018116981A1 PCT/JP2017/045104 JP2017045104W WO2018116981A1 WO 2018116981 A1 WO2018116981 A1 WO 2018116981A1 JP 2017045104 W JP2017045104 W JP 2017045104W WO 2018116981 A1 WO2018116981 A1 WO 2018116981A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
recess
cover member
surface portion
main surface
glass substrate
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/045104
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
諭 金杉
麻耶 波田野
Original Assignee
旭硝子株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 旭硝子株式会社 filed Critical 旭硝子株式会社
Publication of WO2018116981A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018116981A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C03GLASS; MINERAL OR SLAG WOOL
    • C03CCHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF GLASSES, GLAZES OR VITREOUS ENAMELS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF GLASS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF FIBRES OR FILAMENTS MADE FROM GLASS, MINERALS OR SLAGS; JOINING GLASS TO GLASS OR OTHER MATERIALS
    • C03C15/00Surface treatment of glass, not in the form of fibres or filaments, by etching
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C03GLASS; MINERAL OR SLAG WOOL
    • C03CCHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF GLASSES, GLAZES OR VITREOUS ENAMELS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF GLASS; SURFACE TREATMENT OF FIBRES OR FILAMENTS MADE FROM GLASS, MINERALS OR SLAGS; JOINING GLASS TO GLASS OR OTHER MATERIALS
    • C03C21/00Treatment of glass, not in the form of fibres or filaments, by diffusing ions or metals in the surface
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16Constructional details or arrangements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a cover member, a manufacturing method thereof, and a portable information terminal.
  • the fingerprint authentication method uses optical, thermal, pressure, capacitive, and ultrasonic sensors.
  • capacitive and ultrasonic methods are said to be excellent.
  • a capacitance type sensor detects a local change in capacitance at a site where an object to be detected approaches or comes into contact.
  • a general electrostatic capacity type sensor measures the distance between an electrode arranged in the sensor and an object to be detected based on the size of the electrostatic capacity.
  • the ultrasonic sensor can detect an object to be detected in three dimensions by using ultrasonic waves.
  • This method is expected as a biometric authentication sensor that can detect a foreign substance such as a liquid by transmitting it and improve security. Since the fingerprint authentication function using such a sensor is small and light and has low power consumption, it is particularly mounted on a personal information terminal (PDA) such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, or a tablet personal computer.
  • PDA personal information terminal
  • a cover member is disposed above the sensor.
  • a protective cover is arranged on the top of the sensor to protect the capacitive sensor.
  • a hole is provided in a cover member that allows a sensor to detect an object, and a sensor cover is disposed in the hole.
  • Patent Document 2 as a cover member for a portable device, a concave portion for allowing a user to recognize a character or a figure is formed on the main surface of the cover member.
  • the visibility of the recess is improved by increasing the haze value (cloudiness) of the recess.
  • the surface roughness Ra of the recesses is made larger than the surface roughness Ra of the main surface flat portion.
  • the tactile sensation for recognizing the concave portion is improved by the difference in touch between the concave portion and the main surface flat portion.
  • a recess is formed on the surface of the cover member, but the surface of the recess is roughened so that a user can recognize characters or figures. It is not intended to place the sensor on the opposite surface of the recess.
  • a sensor is arrange
  • the distance between the sensor electrode and the object to be detected becomes non-uniform and the detected capacitance becomes non-uniform. In this case, the sensor sensitivity is lowered, and there is a possibility that a desired function cannot be exhibited.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a cover member that is excellent in design and that can easily incorporate various devices such as sensors and that can easily recognize the position thereof, a portable information terminal having the cover member, and a method of manufacturing the cover member. There is.
  • the cover member of the present invention is a cover member that protects an object to be protected, the first main surface of the cover member being provided with a first recess, and the first recess on the second main surface.
  • a second recess is provided at a corresponding position, and the first recess has a first bottom surface formed in a curved shape.
  • the cost can be reduced.
  • the first recess facing the second recess is provided on the surface of the cover member, so that the position of the device can be easily detected visually or by touch. Can be recognized.
  • the first bottom surface portion in the first recess is formed in a curved shape, the position of the device can be easily detected by tactile sensation as compared to the case where the first bottom surface portion is formed in the same plane as the first main surface. Can be recognized.
  • it is not necessary to roughen the first recess in order for the user to recognize a device such as a sensor the distance between the sensor electrode and the object to be detected can be made uniform, and a decrease in sensor sensitivity can be suppressed.
  • the first bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the first main surface side, and the first recess portion includes an opening edge of the first recess portion and the first recess portion. It is preferable that a first connection surface portion that connects the outer edge of the bottom surface portion is provided. In the cover member of the present invention, it is preferable that the first bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface side. In this aspect of the present invention, the user's finger can be in close contact with the first bottom surface, and the uncomfortable feeling during device recognition can be reduced.
  • a straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface portion in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a first reference line L1 and the first reference line L1 farthest from the first reference line L1.
  • the distance H1 from the first reference line L1 to the first point A1 is 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • a straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface portion in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a first reference line L1 and the first reference line L1 farthest from the first reference line L1.
  • the point on the bottom surface of 1 is the first point A1
  • the point corresponding to the first point A1 in the second recess is the corresponding point B2
  • the absolute value of the difference between the depth J1 up to A1 and the depth J2 from the second main surface to the corresponding point B2 is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more.
  • a curved second bottom surface portion is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion in the second recess.
  • the second bottom surface portion has a curved shape protruding toward the second main surface side, and the second recess portion includes an opening edge of the second recess portion and the second recess portion. It is preferable to include a second connection surface portion that connects the outer edge of the bottom surface portion.
  • the second bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the first main surface side.
  • a straight line connecting both ends of the second bottom surface portion in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a second reference line L2 and the second reference line L2 farthest from the second reference line L2.
  • 2 is a second point A2, it is preferable that a distance H2 from the second reference line L2 to the second point A2 is 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • a second bottom surface portion protruding in a curved shape in the same direction as the first bottom surface portion is formed at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion in the second recess, It is preferable that a thin part is comprised by the area
  • the tangent lines at the portion where the first bottom surface portion and the second bottom surface portion overlap with each other are substantially parallel and fall within a certain range of the thickness of the thin portion. Therefore, for example, when a capacitive sensor is arranged, good sensing sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the first recess overlaps the second recess in a plan view of the cover member.
  • the cover member of the present invention when chemically strengthening the glass substrate provided with the first concave portion and the second concave portion, only the shapes of the first and second concave portions in a plan view are formed in an appropriate positional relationship. Thus, a cover member having a curved first surface is obtained.
  • the distance between the center of gravity of the first recess and the center of gravity of the second recess in a plan view of the cover member is 100 ⁇ m or less. In this aspect of the present invention, the positional deviation of the first and second recesses in plan view is reduced, and a good appearance can be obtained.
  • the potassium ion concentration in the first main surface and the second main surface is higher than the potassium ion concentration in the center in the thickness direction of the cover member. According to this aspect of the present invention, a cover member having high strength can be obtained.
  • the cover member of this invention WHEREIN: It is preferable that the said protection object is a portable information terminal.
  • the portable information terminal of the present invention has the above-described cover member. According to the above aspect of the present invention, a portable information terminal protected by a cover member can be obtained.
  • the cover member manufacturing method of the present invention is a cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member that protects an object to be protected from a glass substrate, and the first concave portion is formed on the first main surface of the glass substrate. Forming a second recess at a position corresponding to the first recess on the second main surface, chemically strengthening the glass substrate on which the first recess and the second recess are formed, and the recess.
  • the first concave portion includes a flat first bottom surface portion
  • the second concave portion is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion
  • the first bottom surface portion is formed.
  • a planar second bottom surface portion constituting a thin portion is formed by a region sandwiched between the first portion and the second concave portion, and the processing is performed so that the first concave portion overlaps the second concave portion in plan view.
  • the cover member manufacturing method of the present invention is a cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member that protects an object to be protected from a glass substrate, and the first concave portion is formed on the first main surface of the glass substrate. Forming a second recess at a position corresponding to the first recess on the second main surface, chemically strengthening the glass substrate on which the first recess and the second recess are formed, and the recess When the first recess is formed, the first recess has a planar first bottom surface portion, and a first connection surface portion that connects the opening edge of the first recess and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion.
  • the second recess is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion, and a planar second bottom surface portion constituting a thin portion by a region sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion and A second contact connecting the opening edge of the second recess and the outer edge of the second bottom surface portion. And a surface portion, and performs the first depth of the depth and the second bottom surface portion of the bottom portion is different so treated. According to the above aspect of the present invention, it is possible to obtain a cover member in which the first and second bottom surface portions are curved in a curved shape on the first main surface side or the second main surface side only by chemically strengthening the glass substrate. It is done.
  • the cover member manufacturing method of the present invention is a cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member that protects an object to be protected from a glass substrate, and the first concave portion is formed on the first main surface of the glass substrate.
  • the second recess is formed at a position corresponding to the first recess on the second main surface, and the first recess protrudes toward the first main surface when the recess is formed.
  • the processing is performed so as to include a second bottom surface portion that constitutes a thin-walled portion by a region sandwiched between the portions. According to this aspect of the present invention, it is possible to obtain a cover member in which the first and second bottom surface portions are curved in a curved shape toward the first main surface without chemically strengthening the glass substrate.
  • FIG. 2A is a cross-sectional view taken along line IIA-IIA in FIG. 1B
  • FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view taken along line IIB-IIB in FIG.
  • A) is sectional drawing of the cover member in another example
  • B) is sectional drawing of the cover member which has arrange
  • (A), (B) is sectional drawing of the cover member which has arrange
  • (A)-(C) are sectional views of a cover member in still another example. It is explanatory drawing of the manufacturing method of a cover member, (A) The top view from the 1st main surface side of a cover member, (B) is a top view of the 1st, 2nd mask member, (C) is flat form Sectional drawing of the cover member provided with this thin part. The figure which shows each CS-DOL profile at the time of chemically strengthening on different conditions. The figure which shows the CS-DOL profile at the time of implementing a two-step chemical strengthening on different conditions. Explanatory drawing of how to obtain intersection Q.
  • FIGS. 4A to 4D are cross-sectional views of cover members each provided with a fingerprint-proof coating layer.
  • FIGS. 4A to 4D are cross-sectional views of cover members of other examples each provided with a fingerprint-proof coating layer.
  • (A), (B) is sectional drawing of the cover member in which the printing layer was provided, respectively.
  • (A) is an enlarged view of the XVIIIA part of FIG. 17,
  • (B) is an enlarged view of the XVIIIB part.
  • (A) is a top view of a glass substrate
  • (B) is a top view of the 1st, 2nd mask member of another example.
  • (A) is a top view of the 1st, 2nd mask member of further another example
  • (B) is a glass substrate top view obtained by the process using the 1st, 2nd mask member of (A).
  • FIGS. 7A to 7D are cross-sectional views of cover members of Examples 1 to 4 before a chemical strengthening simulation in Example 7.
  • the cover member which concerns on this embodiment is used in order to protect arbitrary protection objects.
  • the protection target of the cover member will be described as being a mobile information terminal such as a smartphone, but any target can be applied as the protection target.
  • the present invention can be applied to a display device combined with a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel or an EL panel. In particular, it is also excellent as a method for efficiently producing a large cover member for a vehicle-mounted display.
  • the cover member 1 of the present embodiment is a substantially flat rectangular parallelepiped as a whole, and includes a first main surface 3 on the upper side of FIG. 1 and the second main surface 5 on the lower side of FIG.
  • the first main surface refers to an outer surface of an assembly (assembly) including the cover member 1, that is, a surface that can be touched by a user in a normal use state.
  • the second main surface means an inner surface of the assembly, that is, a surface that cannot be touched by the user in a normal use state.
  • the longitudinal direction of the cover member 1 is the X direction
  • the short direction is the Y direction
  • the thickness direction is the Z direction.
  • the cover member 1 may be glass having one or more bent portions.
  • the first main surface may be a surface that cannot be touched by the user
  • the second main surface may be a surface that can be touched by the user.
  • the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1 is provided with at least one first recess 7.
  • a second recess 14 is provided at a position corresponding to the first recess 7 in the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1.
  • 1A to 1C show an example in which the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 of the cover member 1 are provided with one first and second concave portions 7 and 14, respectively. It is shown.
  • the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed in the vicinity of the end portion of the cover member 1 in the X direction and in the vicinity of the center portion in the Y direction.
  • the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed in an oval shape whose length in the Y direction is longer than that in the X direction when viewed from the ⁇ Z direction and the + Z direction, respectively.
  • the positions where the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed are such that they face each other in the Z direction (overlapping in the XY plane, that is, the first recess 7 and the second recess 14 are in plan view). As long as they are overlapped), they can be set at any position.
  • the distance between the position of the center of gravity of the first recess 7 and the position of the center of gravity of the second recess 14 in plan view of the cover member 1 is set so that the positional deviation between the first and second recesses 7 and 14 becomes inconspicuous. 100 ⁇ m or less is preferable.
  • the cover member 1 has one or more bent portions, the first and second concave portions 7 and 14 may be formed in the bent portion.
  • the number and shape of the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are also arbitrary.
  • the first concave portion 7 includes a first bottom surface portion 8 projecting in a curved shape on the first main surface 3 side, and an opening of the first concave portion 7.
  • a first connection surface portion 11 that connects the edge and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 8 is provided.
  • the outer edge of the 1st bottom face part 8 is the 2nd main surface in the part which protrudes in the 1st main surface 3 side in sectional view. It is a part located on the 5 side.
  • the first bottom surface portion 8 is an oval region, and the first connection surface portion 11 is an oval region surrounding the first bottom surface portion 8.
  • the first connection surface portion 11 has a curved surface shape (R shape) that smoothly connects the first bottom surface portion 8 and the first main surface 3.
  • the curvature radius of the first connection surface portion 11 increases from the first bottom surface portion 8 side toward the opening edge side of the first recess 7. With this configuration, the stress concentration at the connection portion between the first bottom surface portion 8 and the first connection surface portion 11 is relaxed, and the strength is improved.
  • the fingerprint authentication sensor 40 sensor 40
  • the finger is pressed against the thin portion 21 each time authentication is performed. Since a repetitive force is applied, there is an effect of suppressing stress concentration in that portion in terms of shape.
  • the second concave portion 14 constitutes a curved second bottom surface portion 15 that protrudes toward the first main surface 3 side.
  • the second bottom surface portion 15 includes a second thin portion constituting portion 16 and a second connecting portion constituting portion 17.
  • the second thin portion constituent portion 16 is provided so as to overlap the first bottom surface portion 8 in plan view, and is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the first bottom surface portion 8.
  • the second connection part component part 17 is provided so as to overlap the first connection surface part 11 in plan view, and connects the outer edge of the second thin part component part 16 and the outer edge of the second bottom surface part 15. Note that the second thin portion constituting portion 16 is a portion overlapping the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 8 in plan view.
  • the cover member 1 is formed with a thin portion 21, a thick portion 22, and a connection portion 23.
  • the thin portion 21 is a curved plate-like portion sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8 and the second thin portion constituent portion 16.
  • the thick portion 22 is a portion that is sandwiched between regions of the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 where the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are not provided.
  • the connecting portion 23 is a region sandwiched between the first connecting surface portion 11 and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 and is a portion connecting the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22.
  • a sensor for fingerprint authentication or the like is provided in the second recess 14. Since various devices such as a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and an organic EL panel, illumination, and a camera can be arranged, space efficiency can be improved. Examples of sensors include biometric sensors such as fingerprints, irises, and veins. Capacitance type, optical type, infrared type, and ultrasonic type sensors are known as sensing methods. A sensor etc. are mentioned.
  • the material can be used without using a different material such as a sensor cover unlike the invention of Patent Document 1 described above. Therefore, it is possible to realize the cover member 1 having a uniform and uniform design and excellent design. Further, since the number of members is small and the assembly process can be simplified, there is a great effect in cost reduction. Furthermore, since the opening of the cover member for incorporating another member can be reduced, waterproof and drip-proofing can be easily provided. Furthermore, since the thick wall portion 22 has a planar shape, the thin wall portion 21 is recessed as viewed from the front surface side, so that the user of the portable information terminal can determine the position of the thin wall portion 21 and the thin wall portion 21.
  • the positions of various devices on the back side can be easily recognized by visual or tactile senses.
  • the first bottom surface portion 8 of the first recess 7 is formed in a curved shape protruding toward the first main surface 3, the positions of various devices can be easily recognized by tactile sensation.
  • the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are provided by a machining process such as grinding or a molding process such as hot pressing or vacuum forming, but are preferably provided by etching. According to the etching, fine scratches and defects are removed, and the strength of the cover member 1 is improved. Moreover, according to the etching, it is easy to control the thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction, and it is completed in one step.
  • the curved plate-like thin portion 21 sandwiched between the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 is provided by mechanical processing such as grinding, but is preferably provided by chemical strengthening. According to the chemical strengthening, the thin wall portion 21 is warped by utilizing the surface expansion caused by the shape difference between the first and second concave portions 7 and 14, and the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 are easily curved. Can be formed.
  • the connecting portion P1 between the first concave portion 7 and the first main surface 3 and the connecting portion P2 between the second concave portion 14 and the second main surface 5 are also smoothly continuous curved surfaces. It is preferable to make it into a shape. By making the connecting portions P1 and P2 into a curved surface without edges, there is an effect of making it difficult to cause chipping or breakage due to dropping or contact with an external hard member. In order to make the connecting portions P1 and P2 have a smoothly continuous curved surface shape, the connecting portions P1 and P2 are finished by buffing or the like after the first and second concave portions 7 and 14 are formed.
  • the time until the glass substrate is separated from the etchant and the mask is peeled and cleaned after the etching process is maintained longer than usual.
  • the connecting portions P1 and P2 can be smoothly curved.
  • the etchant remains due to surface tension at the boundary between the first and second recesses 7 and 14 formed by etching and the mask, and the first and second recesses 7 and 14 and the first and first recesses in contact with the remaining etchant.
  • Etching proceeds slightly at the connecting portions P1 and P2 with the main surfaces 3 and 5, so that the edges of the connecting portions P1 and P2 become smooth continuous curved surfaces.
  • the holding time for this is adjusted between several seconds to several tens of minutes depending on the etchant used and the etching resistance of the glass substrate.
  • the first recess 7 with which the finger is brought into contact has the first connecting surface portion 11 as a smooth curved surface as described above.
  • the first recess 7A is composed of a first bottom surface portion 8A and a planar first connection surface portion 11A extending in the Z direction (perpendicular to the XY plane).
  • the two concave portions 14A may be constituted by a curved second bottom surface portion 15A corresponding to the first bottom surface portion 8A and a planar second connection surface portion 18A extending in the Z direction.
  • first connecting surface portion 11A and the first main surface 3 are connected to each other vertically, and the second connecting surface portion 18A and the second main surface 5 are also connected to each other vertically.
  • a portion sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8A and the second bottom surface portion 15A constitutes a thin portion 21A.
  • a portion sandwiched between regions where the first and second concave portions 7A and 14A are not provided in the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 constitutes a thick portion 22A.
  • the height T1 of the first connection surface portion 11A and the height T2 of the second connection surface portion 18A may be the same.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 constituting the thin portion 21 is preferably 50 nm or less, and more preferably 45 nm or less. Preferably, it is 30 nm or less.
  • the sensor 40 such as a capacitive sensor or an ultrasonic sensor is disposed in the second recess 14 (the second bottom surface portion 15 constituting the thin portion 21) via the adhesive layer 41.
  • an object to be detected for example, a finger
  • the adhesive layer 41 may not be provided.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 is 50 nm or less because the sensing sensitivity is increased because the arithmetic average roughness Ra is sufficiently smaller than the degree of unevenness of the fingerprint of the finger. Further, in such a configuration, the user of the display device or the portable information terminal uses the first recess 7 to detect the position of the thin portion 21 and the sensor 40 disposed on the second recess 14 side of the thin portion 21. The position can be easily recognized visually or by touch. Further, the lower limit of the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 nm or more, and more preferably 4 nm or more.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 can be adjusted by selection of polishing abrasive grains, a polishing method, and the like.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra can be measured based on Japanese Industrial Standard JIS B0601.
  • the adhesive layer 41 and the sensor 40 are housed in the second recess 14 and can be easily combined with the protection target.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the second bottom surface portion 15 constituting the thin wall portion 21 is more preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and even more preferably 30 nm or less, like the first bottom surface portion 8. .
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the second bottom surface portion 15 is 50 nm or less, it is preferable in that the sensitivity is sufficiently smaller than the degree of unevenness of the fingerprint of the finger and the sensing sensitivity is increased.
  • the straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface portion 8 in the cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member 1 is the point farthest from the first reference line L1 and the first reference line L1.
  • the distance H1 from the first reference line L1 to the first point A1 is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the vertex (1st point A1) of the 1st bottom face part 8 is located below the 1st main surface 3 (cover member inside side).
  • the first main surface 3 The absolute value of the difference between the depth J1 from the first principal point A1 to the depth J2 from the second principal surface 5 to the corresponding point B2 is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the absolute value of the difference between the depth J1 and the depth J2 is more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the configuration shown in FIG. 4B the configuration shown in FIG. In this configuration, the first bottom surface portion 8B, the first thin portion constituent portion 9B, and the first connecting portion constituent portion 10B of the first concave portion 7B are the same as the second bottom portion 15 and the second thin portion in FIG.
  • the second bottom surface portion 15B and the second connection surface portion 18B of the second concave portion 14B correspond to the first bottom surface portion 8 and the first connection portion 18B in FIG.
  • a thin portion 21B, a thick portion 22B, and a connection portion 23B are provided.
  • the sensor 40B is disposed on the second concave portion 14B side of the thin portion 21B.
  • the first bottom surface portion 8B has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface 5 side.
  • the second bottom surface portion 15B has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface 5 side.
  • the second recess 14B includes a second connection surface portion 18B that connects the opening edge of the second recess 14B and the outer edge of the second bottom surface portion 15B.
  • the second bottom surface that is the point farthest from the second reference line L2 and the second reference line L2 is a straight line connecting both ends of the second bottom surface portion 15B in the sectional view of the cover member 1 in the thickness direction.
  • the distance H2 from the second reference line L2 to the second point A2 is 5 ⁇ m or more.
  • the first and second recesses need not have the same shape, and may have different areas, formations, and the like.
  • apparatus such as a sensor arrange
  • size of a 2nd recessed part can be changed suitably.
  • the length of the first recess 7C of the first main surface 3 in the Y direction and the X direction is set to the length of the second recess 14C of the second main surface 5 and You may make it longer than the length of a X direction, ie, the outer edge of the 1st recessed part 7C may be located outside the outer edge of the 2nd recessed part 14C in the planar view of the cover member 1.
  • FIG. 5A the length of the first recess 7C of the first main surface 3 in the Y direction and the X direction is set to the length of the second recess 14C of the second main surface 5 and You may make it longer than the length of a X direction, ie, the outer edge of the 1st recessed part 7C may be located outside the
  • the first concave portion 7C includes a curved first bottom surface portion 8C protruding toward the first main surface 3, the opening edge of the first concave portion 7C, and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 8C. 11C of 1st connection surface parts to connect are provided.
  • the first bottom surface portion 8C includes a first thin portion constituting portion 9C located at the center of the first bottom surface portion 8C, and a first connecting portion constituting portion 10C surrounding the first thin portion constituting portion 9C. ing. 14 C of 2nd recessed parts are provided with the curved 2nd bottom face part 15C which protrudes in the 1st main surface 3 side.
  • the second bottom surface portion 15C includes a second thin portion constituent portion 16C and a second connecting portion constituent portion 17C.
  • the second thin portion constituting portion 16C is formed in a curved surface shape corresponding to the first thin portion constituting portion 9C.
  • a curved plate-like portion having a constant thickness sandwiched between the first thin portion constituting portion 9C and the second thin portion constituting portion 16C constitutes the thin portion 21C.
  • a portion sandwiched between regions where the first and second concave portions 7C and 14C are not provided in the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 constitutes a thick portion 22C.
  • the dimension of the sensor 40C can be made smaller than the dimension of the first recess 7C in the Y direction and the X direction.
  • the sensor 40C includes a sensor main body 46C that performs sensing, and a housing 47C that supports and fixes the outer periphery of the sensor main body 46C in the XY direction. Therefore, the thin part 21C can be reinforced by making the overall dimension of the sensor 40C smaller than the dimension of the first concave part 7C and disposing the sensor 40C on the second concave part 14C side of the thin part 21C.
  • the configuration shown in FIG. 5A may be vertically inverted.
  • the first concave portion facing portion 3D, the first bottom surface portion 8D of the first concave portion 7D, the first thin portion constituting portion 9D, and the first connecting portion constituting portion 10D are as shown in FIG.
  • the second concave portion 14D corresponds to the second concave portion facing portion 5C, the second bottom surface portion 15C of the second concave portion 14C, the second thin portion constituting portion 16C, and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17C.
  • the bottom surface portion 15D, the second thin portion constituting portion 16D, the second connecting portion constituting portion 17D, and the second connecting surface portion 18D are the first bottom face portion 8C of the first recess 7C in FIG.
  • a thin portion 21D, a thick portion 22D, and a connecting portion 23D are provided.
  • the outer edge of the first recess 7D is located inside the outer edge of the second recess 14D.
  • the thin portion 21D can be reinforced by making the overall size of the sensor 40D larger than the size of the first concave portion 7D and disposing the sensor 40D on the second concave portion 14D side of the thin portion 21D.
  • the size of the sensor body 46D is preferably smaller than the overall size of the first recess 7D in order to appropriately perform sensing. That is, the overall dimension of the first recess 7D is preferably larger than the dimension of the sensor body 46D and smaller than the overall dimension of the sensor 40D.
  • the second recess 14E is composed of a planar second bottom surface portion 15E and a second connection surface portion 18E, and the first bottom surface portion 8 and the second bottom surface portion 8E. You may form the thin part 21E pinched
  • a connection portion 23E sandwiched between the first connection surface portion 11 and the second connection surface portion 18E, and a thick portion 22E composed of portions other than the thin portion 21E and the connection portion 23E are provided.
  • the second concave portion 14F is constituted by a second bottom surface portion 15F that protrudes in a curved shape toward the second main surface 5 side, and a second connection surface portion 18F.
  • the thin wall portion 21F sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8 and the second bottom surface portion 15F may be formed.
  • a connection portion 23F sandwiched between the first connection surface portion 11 and the second connection surface portion 18F, and a thick portion 22F configured by portions other than the thin portion 21F and the connection portion 23F are provided.
  • the first concave portion 7G is constituted by a first bottom surface portion 8G protruding in a curved shape on the second main surface 5 side
  • the second concave portion 14G is formed as the first concave portion 14G. You may comprise by the 2nd bottom face part 15G which protrudes in the main surface 3 side.
  • the haze value (cloudiness) of the thin-walled portion 21 is preferably 16% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and further preferably 10% or less.
  • the haze value of the thin portion 21 is preferably 16% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and further preferably 10% or less.
  • the surface flatness of the thin portion 21 affects the surface flatness of the printed layer when printing is performed on the second bottom surface portion 15 of the thin portion 21.
  • the haze value of the thin-walled portion 21 is set to 16% or less, surface flatness that does not affect the sensor sensitivity can be secured, and the aesthetics of the printed layer described later can be made excellent.
  • the haze value of the thin portion 21 is larger than 16%, the ink used for printing does not completely enter the unevenness formed on the outermost surface of the thin portion 21, and the appearance after the cover member 1 is mounted on the protection target. Deteriorate.
  • the haze value of the thin portion 21 is set to 16% or less, and the transmittance of the thin portion 21 is increased so that there is a sense of unity between the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22, and the cover has excellent aesthetics as a whole. A member can be realized.
  • the haze value of the thick portion 22 is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 1% or less, further preferably 0.5% or less, and particularly preferably 0.2% or less.
  • the thick part 22 has high surface flatness and transmittance
  • an anti-glare process described later may be performed.
  • the haze value at this time is not limited to the above range.
  • the haze value of the thin part 21 can be adjusted by the etching conditions at the time of providing the 1st, 2nd recessed parts 7 and 14. The haze value can be measured based on Japanese Industrial Standard JIS K7136.
  • the cover member 1 is preferably a chemically strengthened glass.
  • the chemically strengthened cover member 1 has high mechanical strength because the compressive stress layer is formed on the surfaces of the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22, that is, the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5. It is done.
  • CT chemical strengthening is performed by immersing in a general alkali metal molten salt on a glass having a portion having a partially different plate thickness, such as the cover member 1 having the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22, the first main component is obtained.
  • the thin portion 21 it is preferable to give CS and DOL to the thin portion 21 so that the thin portion 21 is not destroyed while giving the thick portion 22 CS and DOL equivalent to those of a normal flat cover member. That is, it is preferable that the depth of the compressive stress layer formed in the thin portion 21 is smaller than the depth of the compressive stress layer formed in the thick portion 22.
  • the CS of the thick portion 22 is preferably 400 MPa or more, more preferably 500 MPa or more, further preferably 600 MPa or more, and the DOL is preferably 15 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or more, and further preferably 25 ⁇ m. That's it.
  • the CS of the thick portion 22 is preferably 1300 MPa or less, more preferably 1200 MPa or less, more preferably 1100 MPa or less, and the DOL is preferably 100 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 80 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • the CS of the thin-walled portion 21 is preferably 300 MPa or more, more preferably 400 MPa or more, more preferably 500 MPa or more, and DOL is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 7 ⁇ m or more, and further preferably 10 ⁇ m or more.
  • the CS of the thin wall portion 21 is preferably 1300 MPa or less, more preferably 1200 MPa or less, further preferably 1100 MPa or less, and the DOL is preferably 25 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, and further preferably 15 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thick portion 22 has the same strength as a normal flat cover member having no recess, and the thin portion 21 is given the necessary reinforcement as far as possible.
  • the thin portion 21 is in a position recessed from the first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5, even if the device using the cover member 1 is dropped, the thin portion The probability that 21 is in direct contact with the floor (ground) is low, and even if the thin-walled portion 21 is CS or DOL lower than the thick-walled portion 22, it is difficult to break. A method for differentiating CS and DOL between the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22 will be described later.
  • the cover member 1 is preferably polished on the first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5 in order to improve smoothness.
  • a polishing slurry containing cerium oxide or colloidal silica is used as a polishing agent using a suede pad, scratches (cracks) present on the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 of the cover member 1 and the cover member 1
  • the bending and the dent can be removed, and the strength of the cover member 1 is improved.
  • Polishing may be performed either before or after chemical strengthening of the cover member 1, but is preferably performed after chemical strengthening. This is because defects are generated on the first main surface and the second main surface of the glass plate subjected to chemical strengthening by ion exchange. In addition, fine irregularities of up to about 1 ⁇ m may remain.
  • corrugation which exists in the outermost surface of the glass plate after chemical strengthening is removed by grinding
  • the thickness of the defect layer in which defects are present is usually 0.01 to 0.5 ⁇ m although it depends on the conditions of chemical strengthening.
  • polishing may be performed only on the thick portion 22.
  • effects such as an improvement in sensing sensitivity and an improvement in visibility when a sensor or a display panel is disposed on the second main surface 5 side can be obtained.
  • the thick part 22 is concerned with the intensity
  • the depth (DOL) of the compressive stress layer of the first and second recesses 7 and 14 becomes deeper than the thick portion 22. That is, the cover member 1 that maintains the strength of the thin portion 21 is obtained.
  • polishing may be performed on the first and second concave portions 7 and 14.
  • effects such as improved sensing sensitivity and improved visibility when sensors and display panels are arranged in the first and second recesses 7 and 14 can be obtained.
  • the depth (DOL) of the compressive stress layer of the thick portion 22 becomes deeper than that of the thin portion 21.
  • the cover member 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the use for protecting a portable information terminal, but particularly when used for protecting a display device such as a portable information terminal or a display panel, the thick portion 22.
  • the thickness in the Z direction is preferably 5 mm or less, more preferably 2 mm or less, further preferably 1.5 mm or less, and particularly preferably 0.8 mm or less. This is because if it is thicker than 5 mm, the difference in thickness from the thin portion 21 becomes large, making it difficult to process, and increasing the mass when using a portable information terminal, for example.
  • the thickness of the thick portion 22 in the Z direction is 0.1 mm or more, preferably 0.15 mm or more, and more preferably 0.2 mm or more in order to increase the rigidity. If it is thinner than 0.1 mm, the rigidity becomes too low and there is a risk that the portable information terminal will not be used for protection.
  • the maximum thickness in the Z direction of the thin portion 21 is 1 mm or less, preferably 0.4 mm or less, more preferably 0.35 mm or less, further preferably 0.3 mm or less, particularly preferably 0.25 mm or less. 2 mm or less is particularly preferable, and 0.1 mm or less is most preferable.
  • the capacitance type sensor is arranged on the second concave portion 14 side of the thin portion 21, the thinner the thin portion 21, the larger the detected capacitance and the better the sensing sensitivity. For example, in the case of fingerprint authentication that detects fine irregularities of a fingertip fingerprint, a difference in capacitance according to the fine irregularities of the fingertip fingerprint becomes large, so that detection can be performed with high sensing sensitivity.
  • the lower limit of the thickness in the Z direction of the thin portion 21 is not particularly limited.
  • the thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction is, for example, 0.01 mm or more, and preferably 0.05 mm or more.
  • the Z direction thickness of the thick portion 22 is preferably 10 times or less, more preferably 8 times or less, relative to the Z direction thickness of the thin portion 21. If the thickness in the Z direction of the thick portion 22 is more than 10 times the thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction, it may be difficult to process.
  • the ratio of the thickness in the Z direction of the thick portion 22 to the thickness in the Z direction of the thin portion 21 is not particularly limited and can be set according to the application. In the protection use of a portable information terminal, it is typically 1.5 times or more.
  • the ratio of the area of the thin portion 21 to the thick portion 22 is 1/2 or less, preferably 1/3 or less, and more preferably 1/4 or less.
  • the thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction can be measured by, for example, a laser displacement meter LT-9000 manufactured by Keyence Corporation.
  • the Young's modulus of the thin portion 21 is 60 GPa or more, preferably 65 GPa or more, and more preferably 70 GPa or more.
  • the Young's modulus of the thin-walled portion 21 can be sufficiently prevented from being damaged due to a collision with an external collision object.
  • the sensor for fingerprint authentication is arrange
  • damage to the thin part 21 resulting from fall or collision of a smart phone etc. can fully be prevented.
  • damage to the sensor protected by the thin portion 21 can be sufficiently prevented.
  • the upper limit of the Young's modulus of the thin part 21 is not specifically limited, From a viewpoint of productivity, the Young's modulus of the thin part 21 is 200 GPa or less, for example, and 150 GPa or less is preferable.
  • the Vickers hardness Hv of the thin portion 21 is preferably 400 or more, and more preferably 500 or more.
  • the Vickers hardness of the thin portion 21 is 400 or more, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the thin portion 21 from being scratched due to a collision with a collision object from the outside.
  • the fingerprint authentication sensor is disposed in the second recess 14, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the thin-walled portion 21 from being scratched due to dropping or collision of a smartphone or the like. Furthermore, damage to the sensor protected by the thin portion 21 can be sufficiently prevented.
  • the upper limit of the Vickers hardness of the thin-walled portion 21 is not particularly limited, but if it is too high, polishing and processing may be difficult. Therefore, the Vickers hardness of the chemically strengthened glass is, for example, 1200 or less, and preferably 1000 or less.
  • the Vickers hardness can be measured by, for example, a Vickers hardness test described in Japanese Industrial Standard JIS Z 2244.
  • the relative permittivity of the thin portion 21 at a frequency of 1 MHz is preferably 7 or more, more preferably 7.2 or more, and further preferably 7.5 or more.
  • the capacitance type sensor is arranged in the second recess 14 constituting the thin portion 21, the detected capacitance can be increased by increasing the relative dielectric constant of the thin portion 21, and excellent sensing sensitivity. Can be realized.
  • the relative permittivity of the thin-walled portion 21 at a frequency of 1 MHz is 7 or more, the capacitance corresponding to the fine irregularities of the fingerprint of the fingertip is also obtained in the case of fingerprint authentication for detecting the fine irregularities of the fingerprint of the fingertip. Because the difference between the two becomes large, detection with high sensing sensitivity is possible.
  • the upper limit of the relative dielectric constant of the thin portion 21 is not particularly limited, but if it is excessively high, the dielectric loss increases, the power consumption increases, and the reaction may become slow. Accordingly, the relative dielectric constant of the thin portion 21 at a frequency of 1 MHz is preferably 20 or less, and more preferably 15 or less. The relative dielectric constant is obtained by measuring the capacitance of a capacitance in which electrodes are formed on both surfaces of the cover member 1.
  • a print layer is preferably provided on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1.
  • the fingerprint authentication sensor disposed in the portable information terminal that is the protection target of the cover member 1 or in the second recess 14 is visually recognized through the cover member 1. It can be effectively prevented. Moreover, a desired color can be imparted and an excellent appearance can be obtained.
  • the thickness of the printing layer is preferably 30 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 25 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the thickness of the printed layer is preferably 100 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 50 ⁇ m or less. 25 ⁇ m or less is particularly preferable.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the outermost surface of the printing layer is preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less. More preferably, the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the back surface of the printing layer is also preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less.
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the outermost surface and the back surface of the printed layer is 50 nm or less, it is preferable in terms of increasing sensing sensitivity because it is sufficiently smaller than the degree of unevenness of the fingerprint of the finger.
  • the lower limit of the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the outermost surface and the back surface of the printing layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 nm or more, more preferably 4 nm or more.
  • the cover member 1 described above has at least one first surface facing the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 having the same dimensions as the cover member 1. This is obtained by providing one recess 107 and second recess 114.
  • a method for manufacturing the glass substrate 101 will be described.
  • the raw materials of each component are prepared so as to have the composition described later, and heated and melted in a glass melting furnace.
  • the glass is homogenized by bubbling, stirring, adding a clarifying agent, etc., formed into a glass plate having a predetermined thickness by a known forming method, and slowly cooled.
  • the glass forming method include a float method, a press method, a fusion method, a downdraw method, and a rollout method.
  • a float method suitable for mass production is suitable.
  • continuous molding methods other than the float method, that is, the fusion method and the downdraw method are also suitable.
  • the glass member formed into a flat plate shape by an arbitrary forming method is gradually cooled and then cut into a desired size (the size of the cover member 1).
  • the glass member after cutting may be polished.
  • a glass substrate 101 having a flat first main surface 103 and a second main surface 105 as shown in FIG. 7A and having a flat plate shape as a whole is obtained.
  • the process proceeds to a recess forming step in which at least one first recess 107 and second recess 114 facing the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 are provided.
  • the first mask member 201 as shown in FIG. 7B is disposed on the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101, and the second mask member 301 is disposed on the second main surface 105. Then, the glass substrate 101 is etched.
  • the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the first mask member 201 are set so as to cover the entire first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101.
  • the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the first mask member 201 are substantially equal to the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the glass substrate 101.
  • the first mask member 201 is provided with a first recess forming hole 207 for forming the first recess 107 in the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101. Therefore, the etchant reaches the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101 through the first recess forming hole 207, and the first recess 107 is formed as shown in FIG. In the case where the plurality of first recesses 107 are formed on the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101, the first mask member 201 having the plurality of first recess formation holes 207 may be used.
  • the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the second mask member 301 are set so as to cover the entire second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101.
  • the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the second mask member 301 are substantially equal to the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the glass substrate 101.
  • the second mask member 301 is provided with a second recess forming hole 314 in the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101. Therefore, the etchant reaches the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 through the second recess forming hole 314 and forms the second recess 114.
  • the second mask member 301 having a plurality of second recess formation holes 314 may be used.
  • the glass substrate 101 is provided with at least one first recess 107 and second recess 114, respectively.
  • the first recess 107 includes a planar first bottom surface portion 108 and a first connection surface portion 111 that connects the opening edge of the first recess 107 and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 108.
  • the second concave portion 114 includes a planar second bottom surface portion 115 provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion 108, an opening edge of the second concave portion 114, and an outer edge of the second bottom surface portion 115. And a second connection surface portion 118 for connecting the two.
  • a flat thin portion 121 is formed in a region sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 108 and the second bottom surface portion 115, and a connection portion is formed in a region sandwiched between the first connection surface portion 111 and the second connection surface portion 118. 123 is configured, and the thick portion 122 is configured by a portion other than the thin portion 121 and the connection portion 123. Further, a depth dimension D1 of the first bottom surface portion 108 from the first main surface 103 is smaller than a depth dimension D2 of the second bottom surface portion 115 from the second main surface 105. Thus, by making the depth dimension D1 and the depth dimension D2 different, the thin-walled portion 121 changes from a flat plate shape to a curved plate shape after chemical strengthening.
  • the width dimension W1 of the first recess 107 and the width dimension W2 of the second recess 114 may be made different so that the first recess 107 overlaps the second recess 114 in plan view, for example, FIG.
  • the thin-walled portion 121 changes from a flat plate shape to a curved plate shape after chemical strengthening.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115 constituting the thin portion 121 of the glass substrate 101 is equal to the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 of the cover member 1 described above.
  • 50 nm or less is preferable, 45 nm or less is more preferable, and 30 nm or less is more preferable.
  • the haze value of the thin portion 121 is preferably 16% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and still more preferably 10% or less.
  • the first connection surface portion 111 of the first recess 107 of the glass substrate 101 has a curved surface shape that smoothly connects with the first bottom surface portion 108, similarly to the first connection surface portion 11 of the first recess 7 of the cover member 1. Is preferred. It is preferable that the radius of curvature of the first connection surface portion 111 increases from the central portion of the first recess 107 toward the peripheral portion. The radius of curvature of the first connecting surface portion 111 is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the depth dimension D1 of the first bottom surface portion. The radius of curvature of the first connection surface portion 111 is preferably 0.1 mm or more and 2 mm or less.
  • the connection portion between the first connection surface portion 111 and the first main surface 103 is the same as the connection portion between the first connection surface portion 11 and the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1 (see FIG. 3), and is smooth. A continuous curved surface is preferred.
  • the material of the first mask member 201 and the second mask member 301 is made of, for example, a photosensitive organic material, particularly an etchant-resistant material such as a photosensitive resin material such as a resist, a resin, a metal film, or ceramics.
  • a photosensitive resin material such as a resist, a resin, a metal film, or ceramics.
  • the first and second recess forming holes 207 and 314 are formed by performing predetermined exposure and development.
  • the etching process may be either wet etching or dry etching, but wet etching is preferable from the viewpoint of cost.
  • the etchant include a solution containing hydrofluoric acid as a main component in the case of wet etching, and a fluorine-based gas in the case of dry etching.
  • the etching process is preferably performed while relatively moving the glass substrate 101 and the etchant in a direction (XY direction) parallel to the first main surface 103 or the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101. .
  • Such etching may be performed while the glass substrate 101 is swung in the XY directions, may be performed by causing the etchant to flow in the XY directions, or may be performed in combination.
  • the etching process isotropically proceeds with respect to the glass substrate 101. Therefore, the etching proceeds also in the side surface direction with a radius equal to the depth to be etched just below the opening sides of the first and second recess forming holes 207 and 314, and the first and second recesses of the glass substrate 101.
  • the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 of the 107 and 114 can be curved to smoothly connect to the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115. Further, if etching is performed while relatively moving the glass substrate 101 and the etchant in a direction parallel to the first main surface 103 or the second main surface 105 (XY direction) of the glass substrate 101, the progress of the etching is performed. Along with this, there is a flow of winding from the opening sides of the first and second recess forming holes 207 and 314 toward the first and second recesses 107 and 114 of the glass substrate 101. And the flow velocity from a peripheral part to a side surface becomes quicker than the center part of the 1st, 2nd recessed part 107,114.
  • the etching rate from the periphery of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 to the side surface side becomes relatively high, and the curvature radii of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 are set to be the first and second recesses. 107 and 114 can be enlarged from the center to the periphery. In addition, the radius of curvature of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 can be greater than or equal to the depth dimension of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115.
  • the curvature radius of the side surface of the 1st, 2nd connection surface parts 111 and 118 can be adjusted to 0.1 mm or more and 2 mm or less by adjusting etching processing time and the relative moving speed of the glass substrate 101 and an etchant. Furthermore, etching is performed while relatively moving the glass substrate 101 and the etchant in the direction (XY direction) parallel to the first main surface 103 or the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 as described above. Thus, the first bottom surface 108 can be projected to the first main surface 103 side or the second main surface 105 side toward the center without performing chemical strengthening.
  • an etching process is performed so as to increase the fluidity of the etching solution on the glass substrate 101. Just do it. Further, in order to set the haze value of the thin portion 121 to 16% or less, an etching process may be performed so as to increase the fluidity of the etching solution on the glass substrate 101. In order to form the first main surface 103 side or the second main surface 105 side so that the bottom surface of the first concave portion 107 moves toward the center without performing chemical strengthening, an etching solution is used. The etching process may be performed so as to create a flow that hits the corners of one recess 107.
  • the length of the etching process, the concentration and flow of the chemical used for the etching process, the chemical temperature of the etching May be different.
  • the method of providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114 on the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 is not limited to the method using the etching process as described above, but a method using machining. It doesn't matter. In the method by machining, a grindstone is brought into contact with the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 using a machining center or other numerically controlled machine tool, and a predetermined dimension is obtained. First and second recesses 107 and 114 are formed.
  • grinding is performed at a spindle speed of 100 to 30,000 rpm and a cutting speed of 1 to 10,000 mm / min using a grindstone in which diamond abrasive grains, CBN abrasive grains or the like are fixed by electrodeposition or metal bond.
  • the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are polished to form the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115 and the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118. Also good.
  • the polishing part of the rotary polishing tool is brought into contact with the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 separately at a constant pressure and moved relatively at a constant speed. Do. By polishing under conditions of constant pressure and constant speed, the ground surface can be uniformly polished at a constant polishing rate.
  • the pressure at the time of contact of the polishing portion of the rotary polishing tool is preferably 1 to 1,000,000 Pa in view of economy and ease of control.
  • the speed is preferably 1 to 10,000 mm / min from the viewpoint of economy and ease of control.
  • the amount of movement is appropriately determined according to the shape and size of the glass substrate 101.
  • the rotary polishing tool is not particularly limited as long as the polishing portion can be polished, and examples thereof include a method of attaching the polishing tool to a spindle and a router having a tool chucking portion.
  • a material of the rotary polishing tool at least the polishing portion can process and remove a workpiece such as cerium pad, rubber grindstone, felt buff, polyurethane, etc., and Young's modulus is preferably 7 GPa or less, more preferably 5 GPa or less, and the type is It is not limited.
  • the polishing portion is deformed by pressure to conform to the shapes of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, and the bottom surface and the side surface are set as described above. Can be processed to a surface roughness of.
  • Examples of the shape of the polishing portion of the rotary polishing tool include a circular or donut-shaped flat plate, a cylindrical shape, a shell type, a disk type, and a barrel type.
  • the processing is performed by bringing the polishing processing portion of the rotary polishing tool into contact with the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, it is preferable to perform the processing in a state where polishing abrasive slurry is interposed.
  • the abrasive grains include silica, ceria, alundum, white alundum (WA), emery, zirconia, SiC, diamond, titania, germania, and the like, and the particle size is preferably 10 nm to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the relative moving speed of the rotary polishing tool can be selected in the range of 1 to 10,000 mm / min.
  • the rotational speed of the polishing portion of the rotary polishing tool is 100 to 10,000 rpm. If the number of revolutions is small, the processing rate will be slow, and it may take too much time to achieve the desired surface roughness. If the number of revolutions is large, the processing rate will increase and the wear of the tool will become violent. May be difficult.
  • a pneumatic piston that moves the rotary polishing tool back and forth toward the bottom surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, and other devices that move the rotary polishing tool back and forth toward the side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114. If the pneumatic piston is provided, the pressure of the polishing portion with respect to the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 can be adjusted.
  • the pressures on the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are made independent, and a single rotary polishing tool is brought into contact with each surface at a constant pressure, with a constant speed. , Each surface can be uniformly polished at an independent polishing rate at the same time.
  • polishing may be performed by relatively moving the rotary polishing tool and the glass substrate 101 along the shapes of the first and second recesses 107 and 114.
  • Any moving system may be used as long as the moving amount, direction, and speed can be controlled to be constant.
  • a method using a multi-axis robot or the like can be used.
  • the thin portion 121 is formed from a flat plate shape to a curved plate shape by subsequent chemical strengthening.
  • Chemical strengthening refers to substitution (ion exchange) of alkali ions (for example, sodium ions) having a small ionic radius on the surface layer of glass with alkali ions (for example, potassium ions) having a large ionic radius.
  • the method of chemical strengthening is not particularly limited as long as the alkali ions on the surface layer of the glass can be ion-exchanged with alkali ions having a larger ionic radius.
  • a glass containing sodium ions is replaced with a molten salt containing potassium ions. It can be implemented by processing. In general, the glass substrate is immersed in molten potassium nitrate at a temperature not higher than the glass transition point, and ion exchange is performed.
  • the potassium nitrate molten salt a mixed molten salt in which potassium carbonate salt or the like is mixed may be used.
  • a spraying method of the molten salt or a coating method of powder or paste containing the molten salt may be used. Since such an ion exchange treatment is performed, the composition of the compressive stress layer on the glass surface layer is slightly different from the composition before the ion exchange treatment, but the composition at the center of the substrate thickness is almost the same as the composition before the ion exchange treatment. As a result, the potassium ion concentration in the 1st main surface 3 and the 2nd main surface 5 becomes higher than the potassium ion concentration in the thickness direction center of the cover member 1.
  • a compressive stress layer is formed on the surface layer.
  • the surface compressive stress (CS) of the compressive stress layer of the thin portion 21 or the thick portion 22 of the cover member 1 is controlled within the above range.
  • CS can be measured using a surface stress meter (for example, FSM-6000 manufactured by Orihara Seisakusho).
  • the depth (DOL) of the surface compressive stress layer generated by chemical strengthening can be measured by any method.
  • EPMA electrotron probe
  • the alkali diffusion concentration analysis (potassium ion concentration analysis in this example) in the depth direction of the glass may be performed with a micro analyzer (electron beam microanalyzer), and the ion diffusion depth obtained by the measurement may be DOL.
  • the DOL can also be measured using a surface stress meter (for example, FSM-6000 manufactured by Orihara Seisakusho).
  • the internal tensile stress (CT) of the cover member 1 (glass substrate 101) is preferably 300 MPa or less, more preferably 250 MPa or less, further preferably 200 MPa or less, and particularly preferably 170 MPa or less.
  • the strain point of the glass substrate 101 or the cover member 1 before chemical strengthening is preferably 500 ° C. or higher. This is because when the strain point of the glass substrate 101 or the cover member 1 before chemical strengthening is 500 ° C. or more, the surface compressive stress is hardly relaxed. 530 ° C. or higher is more preferable, and 550 ° C. or higher is more preferable.
  • the manufacturing method of the cover member 1 includes a step of chemically strengthening the glass substrate 101 (first chemical strengthening step), a recess forming step of providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114 in the glass substrate 101, a first And a step of chemically strengthening the glass substrate 101 provided with the second recesses 107 and 114 again (second chemical strengthening step).
  • first chemical strengthening step CS and DOL equivalent to a normal flat cover member are given to the entire glass substrate 101 in which the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are not provided. .
  • the thin portion 121 that is not strengthened is exposed by providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114. Furthermore, in the second chemical strengthening step, the thin-walled portion 121 is not broken again, and the flat thin-walled portion 121 is formed into a curved plate shape like the thin-walled portion 21 as shown in FIG. Re-strengthen under appropriate strengthening conditions. Therefore, suitable strength can be given to the thin portion 121 while giving the thick portion 122 sufficient strength.
  • the glass substrate 101 when chemical strengthening is performed before and after the recess forming step, the glass substrate 101 is heated to 400 to 500 ° C. in 30 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt in the first chemical strengthening step in 1 to 24 hours.
  • the glass substrate 101 is preferably brought into contact with 70 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 350 to 450 ° C. for 1 minute to 3 hours.
  • the outermost surface CS of the thick portion 122 is 400 to 1300 MPa
  • the DOL is 15 to 100 ⁇ m
  • the CS and DOL at the inflection point are 10 to 1000 MPa
  • 1 to 24 ⁇ m respectively.
  • DOL can be 5 to 25 ⁇ m.
  • FIG. 8 shows the CS-DOL profile under two different chemical strengthening conditions.
  • curves representing the relationship between CS and DOL are curves a 1 and a 2 , respectively.
  • the shapes of the curves a 1 and a 2 are different from each other.
  • CS and DOL of the curve a 1 are represented by CS 1 and DOL 1
  • CS and DOL of the curve a 2 are represented by CS 2 and DOL 2 , and the values of both are different.
  • the curve A representing the relationship between CS and DOL of the thick portion 122 of the glass substrate 101 is a curve in which the curves a 1 and a 2 are superimposed.
  • CS and DOL of the curve A are represented by CS A and DOL A.
  • the intersection point Q is obtained as an alternative to the inflection point P, and the value of the intersection point Q is regarded as the above-described “CS and DOL at the inflection point”.
  • the intersection point Q is an intersection point between the tangent line k 1 at (0, CS A ) on the curve A and the tangent line at (DOL A , 0) with k 2 .
  • CS Q and DOL Q which are the values of the Y coordinate and the X coordinate of the intersection point Q are regarded as “CS and DOL at the inflection point”.
  • the thin portion 121 When the thin portion 121 is formed into a curved plate shape by the above-described machining, at least one of the first bottom surface portion 108 and the second bottom surface portion 115 of the thin portion 121 is subjected to chemical strengthening of the thin portion 121.
  • a film may be formed.
  • such films include a surface film formed on the first bottom surface portion 108, a back surface film formed on the second bottom surface portion 115, and the first and second connection surface portions 111. , 118 and the like.
  • the film preferably contains an oxide, nitride, carbide, boride, silicide, metal or the like. This is because a film containing such a substance has a smaller diffusion coefficient of sodium ions and potassium ions in the film than in glass.
  • the oxide examples include a non-alkali oxide, a complex oxide containing an alkali element or an alkaline earth element, and SiO 2 is particularly preferable.
  • SiO 2 as the main component, diffusion of sodium ions and potassium ions in the film is moderately suppressed. Further, since the transmittance of the film is high and the refractive index is close to that of glass, the appearance change due to the coating can be minimized. Also, film composed mainly of SiO 2, the physical durability and chemical durability is high.
  • the film thickness is preferably 10 nm or more, more preferably 12 nm or more, further preferably 15 nm or more, particularly preferably 20 nm or more, and most preferably 25 nm or more.
  • the film thickness is 10 nm or more, chemical strengthening of the portion where the film is formed can be suppressed due to the effect of inhibiting ion exchange. As the film thickness increases, the chemical strengthening suppression effect increases and the curved surface shape can be controlled.
  • the film thickness is preferably 1000 nm or less, more preferably 500 nm or less, further preferably 200 nm or less, particularly preferably 100 nm or less, and most preferably 50 nm or less. If the film thickness exceeds 1000 nm, the thin portion 121 may not be easily strengthened. Moreover, there is a possibility that the difference in appearance between the site with and without the film becomes large.
  • the cover member 1 may be glass that has not been subjected to chemical strengthening when the thin-walled portion 121 is formed into a curved plate shape by machining. That is, the glass substrate 101 does not necessarily need to be subjected to chemical strengthening treatment.
  • the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 may be provided with a plurality of first and second concave portions 107 and 114 that face each other.
  • first and second concave portions 107 and 114 that face each other.
  • the second recesses 107 and 114 may be provided.
  • the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 may be formed with recesses that do not face each other in addition to the first and second recesses 107 and 114 that face each other.
  • FIG. 11 shows a state where the sensor 40H, the camera module 42H, and the liquid crystal layer (display panel) 44H are housed in a housing 43H such as a smartphone.
  • the cover member 1 is provided with a first recess 7H and a second recess 14H.
  • the first recess 7H includes a first bottom surface portion 8H protruding in a curved shape on the first main surface 3 side and a first connection surface portion 11H
  • the second recess 14H is a first bottom surface portion.
  • a second bottom surface portion 15H constituting a curved plate-like thin portion 21H and a second connection surface portion 18H are provided.
  • the sensor 40H is fixed to the second bottom surface portion 15H on the right side in FIG.
  • the liquid crystal layer 44H is fixed to the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via the adhesive layer 45H.
  • the camera module 42H has a lens-side tip fixed to the housing 43H. In such a configuration, the tip of the camera module 42H may extend outward from the housing 43H.
  • the base of the camera module 42H is provided in the second recess 14H. And the thickness of the camera module 42H can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the flash surface including the camera part of the device which is becoming thinner.
  • the lens of the camera module 42H may be fixed to the second recess 14H of the cover member 1 with the tip and base of the camera module 42H reversed.
  • the thin portion 21H of the cover member 1 functions like a “lens protector” often used in lenses of single-lens reflex cameras, and has an effect of protecting the camera lens and preventing dust from entering.
  • the bottom surface of the second recess 14H (the second bottom surface portion 15H of the thin portion 21H) needs to be optically polished, and the second connection surface portion 18H of the second recess 14H needs to be shielded from light. is there.
  • An anti-reflection film such as an AFP film or MgF 2 that makes it difficult to attach a fingerprint may be formed on the second concave portion 14H or the second bottom surface portion 15H of the thin portion 21H.
  • the shape of the first and second recesses 7H and 14H is not particularly limited, and any shape may be applied.
  • the cross-sectional shape seen from the Z direction of the first and second recesses 7H and 14H is not limited to an oval shape, and for example, a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a triangular shape, a rectangular shape, or the like can be applied.
  • the first main surface 3 or the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 may be formed with an anti-glare treatment layer by anti-glare, and in addition, an antireflection layer, an antifouling layer, A functional layer such as an antifogging layer may be formed.
  • the functional layer is preferably formed on the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1.
  • the antiglare treatment include a treatment by etching with hydrofluoric acid, a treatment by coating, and the like.
  • chemical strengthening may be performed after the etching, or etching may be performed after the chemical strengthening, but the etching is preferably performed before the chemical strengthening.
  • chemical strengthening may be performed after coating, or coating may be performed after chemical strengthening.
  • the composition of the central portion of the thick portion and the composition of the antiglare treatment layer can be made different from each other in the thickness direction sectional view of the cover member 1. Accordingly, the composition can be changed so that the refractive index of the antiglare layer is lower than that of the cover member 1, and an antireflection effect can be obtained.
  • the component of the antiglare treatment layer is an inorganic material, either an etching treatment or a coating treatment may be performed, and when the component of the antiglare treatment layer is an organic material, a coating treatment may be performed.
  • an anti-fingerprint (AFP) layer may be formed on the antiglare layer.
  • an inorganic fluoride or an inorganic chloride may be formed so that a layer having fluorine or chlorine exists on the outermost surface of the cover member or the antiglare treatment layer.
  • the hydrophilicity is improved, so that the dirt can be easily washed with water.
  • the anti-glare treatment region 50 When the anti-glare treatment region 50 is applied to the inside and the peripheral portion of the first recess 7 as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, the position of the sensor is instantly determined by tactile sensation without being visually recognized by the user. It is possible to obtain an effect of securing the finger sliding time and improving the authentication probability by friction due to the unevenness of the anti-glare treatment.
  • the antiglare treatment region 50 is preferably provided on at least a part of the peripheral edge of the first recess 7 of the cover member 1 as shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to (C).
  • a sensor is disposed in the second recess 14 to detect a fingerprint of a finger touching the first recess 7. The detection sensitivity can be maintained by providing the antiglare treatment region 50 at the peripheral edge of the first recess 7.
  • an anti-fingerprint coat layer 52 may be formed on the anti-glare treatment layer, for example, as shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 15 (A) to (D).
  • the fingerprint-proof coating layer 52 may be formed on the entire first main surface 3 of the cover member 1. Thereby, even if the cover member 1 is touched with a finger, a fingerprint is difficult to be attached, and even if it is dirty, it is easy to wipe it off. Further, the fingerprint-proof coating layer 52 may be formed on the first bottom surface portion 8 of the thin-walled portion 21 that is frequently touched with a finger such as when performing fingerprint authentication.
  • the static electricity may reduce detection sensitivity depending on the type of sensor.
  • the thick portions 22 (see FIG. 3) of the cover member 1 other than the first concave portions 7 are used. It may be applied only to one main surface 3.
  • the functional layer formation described above may be formed in advance on the glass substrate 101 (see FIG. 7A).
  • the cover member 1 shown in FIGS. 12 to 15 and FIG. 16 described later has the same configuration as that shown in FIG. 2, but some of the reference numerals indicating the respective components in the figure are omitted. It is.
  • first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 are preferably polished.
  • a tempered glass sheet subjected to chemical strengthening by ion exchange has defects on its outermost surface.
  • fine irregularities of up to about 1 ⁇ m may remain.
  • the layer (defect layer) having defects and fine irregularities existing on the first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 after chemical strengthening is removed by polishing.
  • the thickness of the defect layer in which defects are present is usually 0.01 to 0.5 ⁇ m although it depends on the conditions of chemical strengthening.
  • the double-side polishing apparatus has a carrier mounting portion having a ring gear and a sun gear that are driven to rotate at a predetermined rotation ratio, and a metal upper surface plate and a lower surface plate that are driven to rotate reversely with respect to the carrier mounting portion.
  • the carrier mounting portion is mounted with a plurality of carriers that mesh with the ring gear and the sun gear.
  • the carrier rotates on its own center as an axis and moves in a planetary gear so as to revolve around the sun gear, and both sides of the plurality of cover members 1 (the first main surface 3 and the first main surface 3 and the first main surface 3) mounted on the carrier by the planetary gear movement. 2 main surface 5) is polished by friction with the upper surface plate and the lower surface plate.
  • a printing layer may be provided on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1.
  • the print layer can be formed from, for example, an ink composition containing a predetermined color material.
  • the ink composition contains a binder, a dispersant, a solvent, and the like as necessary.
  • the color material may be any color material (colorant) such as a pigment or a dye, and can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the color material can be appropriately selected depending on the desired color. For example, when a light shielding property is required, a black color material or the like is preferably used.
  • the binder is not particularly limited, and for example, polyurethane resin, phenol resin, epoxy resin, urea melamine resin, silicone resin, phenoxy resin, methacrylic resin, acrylic resin, polyarylate resin, polyester type Resin, polyolefin resin, polystyrene resin, polyvinyl chloride, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, polyvinyl acetate, polyvinylidene chloride, polycarbonate, celluloses, polyacetal, and other known resins (thermoplastic resin, thermosetting resin) Resin, photocurable resin, etc.).
  • a binder can be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
  • the printing method for forming the printing layer is not particularly limited, and gravure printing method, flexographic printing method, offset printing method, relief printing method, screen printing method, pad printing method, spray printing method, inkjet printing method, etc.
  • the appropriate printing method can be applied.
  • the place corresponding to the second thin part constituting part 16 or the second connecting part constituting part 17 (see FIG. 2A) in the second bottom face part 15, it is easy to visually understand the place. it can.
  • the place corresponding to the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 is made by specular reflection printing (for example, silver printing)
  • the shape having the curvature of the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 shows the lens effect
  • the second connection Even if the reflection corresponding to the part component 17 is reflected at a wide angle even if the angle of the cover member 1 is changed, it can be sparkled and a high-class feeling can be produced.
  • the printing is performed separately for the second recess 14 and the flat portion where the second recess 14 is not formed on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1. This is because the shape followability is not so high in the printing direction such as the screen printing method, and it is difficult to print the second recess 14 and the flat portion where the second recess 14 is not formed at a time. Therefore, a highly accurate printing layer can be formed by printing these parts individually. Further, the color or texture of printing can be changed between the second concave portion 14 and the flat portion where the second concave portion 14 is not formed, so that the position of the sensor 40 can be visually displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, which is an accent on the design.
  • a first printing layer 31 is provided by a screen printing method or the like on a flat portion where the second recess 14 is not formed on the second main surface 5.
  • a screen printing method or the like is provided on a flat portion where the second recess 14 is not formed on the second main surface 5.
  • the screen printing after a printing material is placed on a screen having an opening, a squeegee is pressed and slid on the screen, and the printing material is pushed out from the opening of the screen to print a pattern of the opening.
  • the 2nd recessed part 14 has the 2nd bottom face part 15 which is a curved surface shape, the pad printing method is suitable with respect to the 2nd recessed part 14.
  • the second printed layer 32 is formed on the entire second bottom surface portion 15 of the second recess 14.
  • the pad printing method is a method in which a soft pad (for example, a silicone pad) provided with an ink pattern on its surface is pressed against a target substrate to transfer the ink pattern onto the substrate surface for printing.
  • Pad printing is sometimes called tampo printing.
  • a pad that is relatively soft and has good shape followability is used. Therefore, printing on the second bottom surface portion 15 is preferably performed by the pad printing method.
  • the printing method such as the screen printing method is not suitable because the shape following property is not so high and the ink cannot be printed on the second bottom surface portion 15.
  • the order of printing on the first and second print layers 31 and 32 is not particularly limited.
  • a flat portion where the second concave portion 14 is not formed in the second main surface 5, the second thin portion constituting portion 16 of the second bottom surface portion 15, and the second You may print separately with the connection part component part 17 of this.
  • the 1st printing layer 31 is provided in the flat part in which the 2nd recessed part 14 is not formed in the 2nd main surface 5 by a screen printing method etc.
  • the second thin portion constituting portion 16 and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 of the second recess 14 are respectively provided with second and third print layers 32 and 33 by a pad printing method.
  • the order of printing for the first to third printing layers 31 to 33 is not particularly limited.
  • the position of the sensor 40 can be easily visually recognized, and the design accents and Become.
  • the design is such that the third print layer 33 is recognized as an annular pattern. it can.
  • the printing method for the flat portion such as the portion where the second concave portion 14 is not formed on the second main surface 5 is not limited to the screen printing method, and the film thickness of the printing layer can be accurately controlled.
  • a rotary screen printing method, a relief printing method, an offset printing method, a spray printing method, or the like may be used.
  • printing by electrostatic copying method, thermal transfer method, ink jet method or the like may be used.
  • the printing method for the curved surface shape such as the second concave portion 14 is not limited to the pad printing method as long as the followability to the curved surface shape is good, and for example, a spray printing method may be adopted.
  • the above-described cover member 1 includes at least a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 from a glass substrate 101 provided with a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 as shown in FIG. It can also be obtained by separating them so as to include one.
  • the outer shape of the cover member 1 to be separated is indicated by a broken line, and a plurality of cover members 1 can be obtained by cutting the glass substrate 101 along the broken line.
  • the cutting line is a straight line as shown by a broken line in the figure, but it need not be a straight line and may be a curved line.
  • the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 are provided with a plurality of first and second concave portions 107 and 114 that face each other.
  • the plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided by etching the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105.
  • the plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are also provided by grinding processing, heat deformation, or the like.
  • the glass substrate 101 is provided with a plurality of thin portions 121 formed in a flat plate shape by providing a plurality of first and second concave portions 107 and 114, and a connection portion (not shown) (see FIG. 7C).
  • the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction and the Y direction. Therefore, the thin portion 121 is also provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction and the Y direction.
  • the plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are not necessarily provided at predetermined intervals. They may be arranged at a plurality of types of intervals, or at least some of them may be arranged at random intervals. However, in order to improve the space efficiency when separating the plurality of cover members 1, a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided at predetermined intervals as shown in FIG. It is preferable to spread 1 without gaps.
  • the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the outermost surface of the thin wall portion 121 is preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less.
  • the haze value of the thin portion 121 is preferably 16% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and still more preferably 10% or less.
  • the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 of the glass substrate 101 are connected to the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115, respectively.
  • a curved shape that connects smoothly is preferable. It is preferable that the curvature radii of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 increase from the central portion of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 toward the peripheral portion.
  • the radii of curvature of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 are preferably set to be greater than or equal to the depth dimensions of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115.
  • the curvature radii of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 are preferably 0.1 mm or more and 2 mm or less.
  • the connecting portion between the first and second connecting surface portions 111 and 118 and the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 is preferably a smoothly continuous curved surface.
  • first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 is aligned when the plurality of cover members 1 are separated.
  • a plurality of first marks 131 and second marks 132 for performing are provided.
  • the extension line in the X direction of the outer shape (broken line in FIG. 17) of each cover member 1 is represented by A
  • the extension line in the Y direction is represented by B.
  • the first marks 131 are arranged in pairs near the cover member 1 so as to sandwich the X-direction extension line A, and paired so as to sandwich the Y-direction extension line B.
  • Each first mark 131 includes a pair of first mark pieces 131A.
  • the first mark piece 131A has a substantially L shape composed of two vertical sides. One side of the first mark pieces 131A adjacent to each other faces each other with a slight gap.
  • the second marks 132 are arranged at the four corners of the glass substrate 101, respectively.
  • the second mark 132 has a substantially cross shape composed of two vertical sides. Of the two sides constituting the second mark 132, a part of the side parallel to the X-direction extension line A intersects with the Y-direction extension line B, and a side parallel to the Y-direction extension line B is a part thereof. Intersects with the X-direction extension line A.
  • the cover member 1 When the cover member 1 is cut and separated from the glass substrate 101, the position of the second mark 132 is read, the cutting location is selected, and the intermediate portion of the first mark 131 (X-direction extension line A or Y-direction extension line). It can be confirmed that the cutting line has come to B), and whether it is cut correctly.
  • the raw materials of each component are prepared so as to have the composition described later, and heated and melted in a glass melting furnace.
  • the glass is homogenized by bubbling, stirring, adding a clarifying agent, etc., formed into a glass plate having a predetermined thickness by a known forming method, and slowly cooled.
  • a glass member formed into a flat plate shape by an arbitrary forming method is gradually cooled and then cut into a desired size.
  • the glass member after cutting may be chamfered or polished. Thereby, the glass substrate 101 which has the flat 1st main surface 103 and the 2nd main surface 105, and is flat form as a whole is obtained.
  • first chemical strengthening step a chemical strengthening process is performed on the glass substrate 101 (first chemical strengthening step).
  • the glass substrate 101 is preferably brought into contact with 30 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 400 to 500 ° C. for 1 to 24 hours.
  • CS and DOL equivalent to a normal flat cover member are given to the whole glass substrate 101 (thin wall portion 121 and thick wall portion 122).
  • the CS of the glass substrate 101 (thick portion 122) obtained by the first chemical strengthening step is preferably 400 MPa or more, more preferably 500 MPa or more, and further preferably 600 MPa or more.
  • the DOL is preferably 15 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or more, and further preferably 25 ⁇ m or more.
  • first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided on the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101.
  • a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided on the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101 as shown in FIG.
  • first and second mask members 201A and 301A as shown in FIG. 19B are arranged on the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101, and then the glass substrate 101 is placed. Etching is performed on the substrate.
  • the X and Y direction dimensions of the first and second mask members 201A and 301A are set so as to cover the entire first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101.
  • the X-direction dimension and the Y-direction dimension of the first mask members 201A, 301A are substantially equal to the X-direction dimension and the Y-direction dimension of the glass substrate 101.
  • the first mask members 201A and 301A have first and second recess formation holes 207A and 314A for forming a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 in the glass substrate 101, respectively. A plurality are provided at predetermined intervals in the direction and the Y direction.
  • the etchant reaches the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101 via the plurality of first and second recess forming holes 207A and 314A, and the plurality of first and second recesses are formed. 107 and 114 are formed.
  • the first mark 131 and the second mark 132 are attached to the glass substrate 101 formed with the plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 by a method such as laser engraving or printing.
  • a glass substrate 101 as shown in FIG. 17 is obtained.
  • the position of the second mark 132 is read, the cutting position is specified, and the glass substrate 101 is cut with a cutting tool such as a diamond cutter, whereby the plurality of cover members 1 are separated.
  • a cutting tool such as a diamond cutter
  • the first and second mask members 201B and 301B have first and second groove forming holes 220B and 320B corresponding to the outer shapes of the plurality of cover members 1. May be.
  • the outer shape of the plurality of cover members 1 is formed on the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101 as shown in FIG.
  • Corresponding grooves 140 are provided.
  • the plurality of cover members 1 can be separated by cutting the glass substrate 101 along the groove 140.
  • the cover member 1 can be more accurately separated. Further, it is not necessary to prepare a mask having the outer shape of the cover member as in the prior art.
  • a plurality of cover members 1 may be separated from the glass substrate 101 so as to include a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114, respectively.
  • first and second recesses 107 and 114 respectively.
  • the second recesses 107 and 114 may be provided.
  • the cover member 1 having the thin portion 121 is obtained.
  • the cover member 1 may be glass having one or more bent portions. Further, the first and second recesses 107 and 114 may be formed in the bent portion.
  • the plurality of cover members 1 may be separated, and after separating the plurality of cover members 1, respectively.
  • the cover member 1 may be chemically strengthened. That is, the former is in the order of the first chemical strengthening step, the recess forming step, the second chemical strengthening step, and the (surface polishing step) cover member separating step, whereas the latter is the first chemical strengthening step and the recess forming step. It is different in the order of the process, the cover member separation process, the second chemical strengthening process, and the (surface polishing process).
  • the surface polishing step is optional, but when this step is performed, it is performed after the final chemical strengthening step (the last chemical strengthening step, that is, the second chemical strengthening step). Moreover, it is preferable to chamfer the end face after the cover member separation step.
  • the thick portion 22 is given the same strength as a normal flat cover member having no recess, By forming the recesses 7 and 14, the flat thin portion 21 that is not strengthened is exposed, and the thin portion 21 is formed into a curved plate shape as shown in FIG. 2A by the second chemical strengthening step. At the same time, the thin-walled portion 21 is given necessary reinforcement as much as possible.
  • the cover member 1 or the glass substrate 101 is preferably brought into contact with 70 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 350 to 450 ° C. for 1 minute to 3 hours.
  • the CS of the thin portion 21 obtained by the second chemical strengthening step is preferably 300 MPa or more, more preferably 400 MPa or more, and further preferably 500 MPa or more.
  • DOL is preferably 5 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 7 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 10 ⁇ m or more.
  • the two chemical strengthening steps, the recess forming step, and the surface polishing step can all be performed in the state of the large glass substrate 101, so that the steps can be made efficient.
  • the steps can be made more efficient to some extent.
  • the second chemical strengthening step is performed after the cover member is separated and the thin portion 21 is formed into a curved plate shape, it is possible to cope with a small equipment such as a polishing apparatus or an ion exchange bath, and the cover member end surface can be chemically strengthened. It is easy to improve the end face strength.
  • the second chemical strengthening step need not be performed.
  • the recess forming step, the first chemical strengthening step, the (surface polishing step), or the cover glass separating step are performed in this order, or the recess forming step, the cover glass separating step, the first chemical strengthening step, (the surface polishing step). ) In this order.
  • the surface polishing step is optional, but when this step is performed, it is performed after the final chemical strengthening step (the last chemical strengthening step, that is, the first chemical strengthening step).
  • the second chemical strengthening step does not need to strengthen the entire cover member 1.
  • at least a part of the cover member 1 may be chemically strengthened, for example, chemical strengthening is performed only on the end face, chemical strengthening is performed only on the bent portion, and chemical strengthening is performed only on the concave portion.
  • part can be chemically strengthened selectively, it can control to desired intensity
  • the cover member 1 can be controlled to a desired shape by partially chemically strengthening the cover member 1.
  • Glass composition examples of the cover member 1 and the glass substrate 101 include any one of the following glasses (i) to (vii).
  • the glass compositions (i) to (v) below are compositions expressed in terms of mol% based on oxides, and the glass compositions (vi) to (vii) are expressed in terms of mass% based on oxides.
  • V SiO 2 60-75%, Al 2 O 3 0.5-8%, Na 2 O 10-18%, K 2 O 0-5%, MgO 6-15%, CaO Glass containing 0-8%.
  • Example 1 An embodiment of the glass substrate 101 shown in FIG. 17 and the manufacturing method thereof will be described.
  • the glass substrate 101 was immersed in 60% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 450 ° C. for 10.5 hours.
  • first and second recesses 107 and 114 were formed on the glass substrate 101 in the X direction in 5 rows at a pitch of 130 mm and in the Y direction in 13 columns at a pitch of 65 mm (see FIG. 19 (A)).
  • the first and second recesses 107 and 114 were in the shape of an ellipse having an X-direction length of 10 mm and a Y-direction length of 13 mm.
  • the depth of the first recess 107 in the Z direction was 0.15 mm
  • the depth of the second recess 114 in the Z direction was 0.2 mm. That is, the thickness in the Z direction of the flat thin portion 121 formed by providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114 was 0.15 mm.
  • the method for forming the first and second recesses 107 and 114 on the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101 is as follows. First, a resist material is applied to the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101, and the resist material is exposed to holes having the same size as the bottom surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 (first and second surfaces). The second recess forming holes 207A and 314A) were opened, and the first and second mask members 201A and 301A shown in FIG. 19B were formed.
  • the glass substrate 101 is immersed in an etching solution containing hydrofluoric acid (HF), and the XYZ directions
  • HF hydrofluoric acid
  • the glass substrate 101 was etched by allowing the HF solution to permeate through the front side and the second recess formation holes 207A and 314A.
  • the flow of the etching solution in the second recess was more active than that in the first recess 107.
  • the glass substrate 101 After etching the glass substrate 101 until the depth of the first recess 107 becomes 0.15 mm and the depth of the second recess 114 becomes 0.2 mm, the glass substrate 101 is pulled up from the HF solution, and a resist material (first , Second mask members 201A, 301A) were peeled off, washed and dried.
  • a resist material first , Second mask members 201A, 301A
  • the glass substrate 101 is brought into contact with 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 400 ° C. for 7 minutes so that the flat thin portion 121 is shown in FIG.
  • the first main surface 103 was formed into a curved surface protruding to the side.
  • first and second marks 131 and 132 for positioning when separating the plurality of cover members 1 were formed on the periphery of the glass substrate 101.
  • a first connection surface portion 111 of the first recess 107 (referred to as “side surface of the first recess 107” in the first and second embodiments) and a second recess 114 are formed.
  • the second connecting portion component 117 (referred to as “the side surface of the second recess 114” in the first and second embodiments) of the second bottom surface portion 115 is respectively the first bottom surface portion 108 (in the first and second embodiments).
  • the radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the first concave portion 107 was about 0.4 mm at the maximum, and the radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the second concave portion 114 was about 0.4 mm at the maximum. Further, the connection portions between the side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 and the flat portions of the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 were substantially vertical.
  • Example 2 Examples of the glass substrate 101 and its manufacturing method will be described.
  • Dragontrail-X which is an aluminosilicate glass manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
  • the glass substrate 101 was brought into contact with 60% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 450 ° C. for 15 hours. Further, the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 were formed into a circular shape having a diameter of 10 mm, and the flat thin portion 121 was formed.
  • the glass substrate 101 is taken out from the etching solution containing hydrofluoric acid (HF), and then held for 30 seconds, and then the resist material (first and second mask members 201A and 301A) is peeled off and washed. .
  • the glass substrate 101 is brought into contact with 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 400 ° C. for 10 minutes, and the flat thin portion 121 is formed as shown in FIG. 1 was formed into a curved surface protruding toward the main surface 103 side.
  • a glass substrate 101 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.
  • the side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are curved surfaces that smoothly connect to the bottom surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, and the radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the first recess 107 is the second
  • the radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the recess 114 was about 0.4 mm at the maximum and about 0.4 mm at the maximum, respectively.
  • the connecting portion between the side surfaces of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 and the flat portion of the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 is a smoothly continuous curved surface, and the radius of curvature of the connecting portion is About 0.4 mm.
  • the radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 was a radius of curvature that is concave toward the glass substrate 101 side.
  • the shape from the side surface of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 to the flat portion of the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 is an inflection point in the middle of the side surface of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114. There was a shape.
  • Example 3 An embodiment of the cover member 1 and the manufacturing method thereof will be described.
  • the glass substrate 101 of Example 1 or 2 was cut into a rectangular size of 130 mm ⁇ 65 mm having one each of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 using a wheel cutting device for cutting glass.
  • a plurality of rectangular cover members 1 each having one first and second concave portions 107 and 114 were obtained.
  • the second mark 132 was read to determine the cutting position.
  • whether or not it was cut correctly was confirmed by checking whether or not a cutting line runs in the center of the first mark 131 and confirmed that it was correctly cut into a predetermined shape. Since the positional relationship between the second mark 132 and the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 is correlated, the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 can be arranged at desired positions of 130 mm ⁇ 65 mm.
  • the corners 2 at the four corners of the rectangular cover member 1 in plan view were cut by CNC (grinding stone) to give a shape with a curvature R.
  • chamfering was performed by CNC.
  • Chamfering can be done in various ways, such as R chamfering (processing to make the glass edge in a semicircular state) and C chamfering (processing to scrape obliquely), but in this example, it was C chamfering.
  • speaker holes 4 are provided at predetermined positions.
  • the first and second recesses 7 and 14 may be formed after the speaker hole 4 is provided in advance. Further, the speaker hole 4 may be provided by etching in another process.
  • the speaker hole 4 may be provided by cutting out the end surface of the cover member 1.
  • CS at the outermost surface of the thick part is 625 MPa, DOL is 45 ⁇ m, CS at the inflection point is 200 MPa, DOL is 6 ⁇ m, and the thin part is The outermost surface CS was 625 MPa, and the DOL was 6 ⁇ m.
  • cover member 1 (Dragonrail-X) obtained from the glass substrate 101 of Example 2 CS of the outermost surface of the thick part is 800 MPa, DOL is 45 ⁇ m, CS at the inflection point is 250 MPa, DOL is 6 ⁇ m, thin wall
  • the outermost surface CS of the part was 800 MPa, and the DOL was 6 ⁇ m.
  • CS and DOL were measured using a glass surface stress meter FSM-6000 manufactured by Orihara Seisakusho. As described above, the values of the intersection point Q are CS and DOL of the inflection points (see FIGS. 8 to 10).
  • This printing forms black three layers 31 to 33 and is substantially the same as the method of forming the first to third printing layers 31 to 33 shown in FIG.
  • the first printing layer 31 was formed by screen printing, and printed in a Z-direction thickness of about 4 ⁇ m by one screen printing. This was carried out twice, and the thickness of the first printed layer 31 in the Z direction was about 8 ⁇ m.
  • the second printed layer 32 was formed by pad printing. A Z-direction thickness of about 3 ⁇ m was printed by one pad printing. This was performed three times, and the thickness of the second printed layer 32 in the Z direction was about 9 ⁇ m.
  • the third printed layer 33 was formed by pad printing. This pad printing was performed three times, and the thickness of the third printed layer 33 in the Z direction was about 9 ⁇ m.
  • the third print layer 33 was configured to overlap the first and second print layers 31 and 32 in the XY direction (to face each other in the Z direction).
  • the black printing of the first printing layer 31 is performed once, and the black printing of the first printing layer 31 is performed once after the printing of the third printing layer 33 is finished. There is also a method. Further, if the process conditions are optimized, the second thin portion constituting portion 16 and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 of the second recess 14 are simultaneously black printed, and the second and third printed layers 32, 33 are printed. Can be formed simultaneously.
  • a fingerprint-proof coating layer (Anti-Fingerprint) was formed on the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1.
  • the method for forming the anti-fingerprint coating layer is generally a solution coating method, a spray method, and a vapor deposition method.
  • a desired cover member 1 was produced.
  • Example 4 An embodiment of the portable information terminal will be described.
  • the sensor surface of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H (see FIG. 11) was brought into contact with and secured to the second bottom surface portion 15 of the second recess 14 of the cover member 1 of Example 3.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer 41 in the Z direction was about 10 ⁇ m.
  • a liquid crystal layer 44H (display panel) was laminated on the non-printing portion of the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via an adhesive layer 45H.
  • the thickness in the Z direction of the adhesive layer 45H was about 100 ⁇ m.
  • a smartphone was produced by incorporating the cover member 1 into the housing 43H together with other components with the first main surface 3 facing outside.
  • the position of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H can be easily recognized by visual or tactile sense. Since the contact position of the finger is fixed to some extent by the one recess 7H, fingerprint reading is facilitated.
  • the sensor surface of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H is brought into contact with and fixed to the second bottom surface portion 15 of the thin portion 21 of the cover member 1. did.
  • the second concave portion 14 is provided on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 and the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H is disposed on the second bottom surface portion 15, there is no problem in the function of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H.
  • the size of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H may be larger than that of the first recess 7. Since the size of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40 ⁇ / b> H is larger than that of the first recess 7, the strength of the cover member 1 in which the thin portion 21 is thin can be increased. More preferably, as shown in FIG. 5B, the dimension of the first recess 7 may be larger than the dimension of the sensor body 46D and smaller than the dimension of the entire fingerprint authentication sensor 40D.
  • a liquid crystal layer 44H (display panel) is laminated on the non-printing portion of the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via the adhesive layer 45H.
  • Example 6 Another embodiment of the portable information terminal will be described.
  • the sensor surface of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H is brought into contact with and secured to the second recess 14H of the cover member 1.
  • a liquid crystal layer 44H (display panel) is laminated on the non-printing portion of the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via an adhesive layer 45H.
  • the thickness in the Z direction of the adhesive layer 45H was about 100 ⁇ m.
  • the light source 48J was brought into contact with the other second concave portion 14H and fixed through the adhesive layer 49J.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer 49J in the Z direction was about 10 ⁇ m.
  • a smartphone was manufactured by incorporating the cover member 1 into the housing 43J together with other components with the surface (first main surface 3) where the second recess 14H is not formed outside.
  • the first concave portion 7H and the second concave portion 14H are irradiated by the light source 48J arranged on the display side of the cover member 1, light is scattered on the side surfaces thereof, so that the position of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40 is visually or tactilely sensed.
  • the fingerprint can be read easily.
  • Example 7 The chemical strengthening simulation result which is Example 7 of the present invention will be described.
  • Examples 1 to 4 are examples, and example 5 is a comparative example.
  • this invention is not limited to a following example.
  • Example 1 to 4 A rectangular parallelepiped having a thickness T1 of 0.71 mm and a main surface of 70 mm ⁇ 150 mm was used as the glass substrate. 24A to 24D, the glass substrate is provided with a width W1 of the first recess 7 on the first main surface 3, a depth D1 of the first recess 7, and a second main surface. The first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed so that the width W2 of the second recess 14 and the depth D2 of the second recess 14 in the surface 5 are the values shown in the drawings, respectively, and the thin portion 21 is formed.
  • the cover member 1 of Examples 1 to 4 having a thickness T2 of 0.15 mm was manufactured.
  • the first and second recesses 7 and 14 have a Y-direction width of 6.5 mm when the X-direction width is 23.5 mm and 8.5 mm when the X-direction width is 27.5 mm. .
  • a protrusion was formed in the first recess 7 by the chemical strengthening simulation model shown below. That is, the thin portion 21 sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8 of the first concave portion 7 and the second bottom surface portion 15 of the second concave portion 14 is formed into a curved surface.
  • the chemical strengthening simulation was performed as follows.
  • C x in the formula (1) is a potassium ion concentration [mol%]
  • C 0 is an initial potassium ion concentration [mol%]
  • C eq is an equilibrium potassium ion concentration [mol%]
  • D is a diffusion coefficient of potassium ion.
  • [M 2 / s] and H are mass transfer coefficients [m / s] of potassium ions, t: time [s], and x: depth [m] from the glass surface.
  • ⁇ x in equation (2) is stress [Pa]
  • B is an expansion coefficient
  • E Young's modulus [Pa]
  • is Poisson's ratio
  • C avg is an average potassium concentration [mol%]. ).
  • L in the formula (3) is a half thickness [m]
  • x is a depth [m] from the glass surface.
  • Example 5 A rectangular parallelepiped having a thickness of 0.71 mm and a main surface of 70 mm ⁇ 150 mm was used as the glass substrate.
  • the first and second recesses 7 and 14 having the same size as that of Example 4 in FIG. In Example 5, no chemical strengthening simulation was required because no chemical strengthening was performed.
  • the straight line connecting the both ends of the first bottom surface portion 8 in the thickness direction sectional view of the cover member 1 Is defined as a first reference line L1.
  • the second connection surface portion 18 connects the opening edge of the second recess 14 and the outer edge of the second bottom surface portion 15.
  • the point that is farthest from the first reference line L1 is defined as the first point A1, and the first point
  • the length of the perpendicular (distance H1) from A1 to the first reference line L1 was determined. The results are shown in Table 2.
  • Example 5 was an unstrengthened sample, there was no protrusion in the first concave portion 7 (the thin portion 21 remained flat), and the length of the perpendicular was 0 ⁇ m.
  • the thin-walled portion 21 had a curved plate shape, and a protruding portion having a desired perpendicular length was obtained. From the above, it was found that Examples 1 to 4 corresponded to Examples of the present invention, and Example 5 corresponded to Comparative Examples of the present invention.
  • Example 4 when the cover glass provided with the protruding portion as in Example 4 corresponding to the embodiment was produced, with respect to the cover member provided with the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be recognized with a finger, and a device such as a sensor is provided. The position could be recognized even when combined.
  • Example 5 since it was not strengthened, the scratch resistance was low, and the touch feeling of the flat portion was poor and did not fit the finger.
  • the cover member having a bent portion includes at least one bent portion.
  • a shape in which a bent portion and a flat portion are combined, a shape in which the entire portion is a bent portion, and the like can be mentioned, but the shape is not particularly limited as long as the bent portion is provided.
  • various devices such as a television, a personal computer, a smartphone, a car navigation system, etc.
  • the bent portion can be manufactured according to the shape of the display panel, the shape of the casing of the display panel, and the like.
  • “Flat part” means a part having an average curvature radius of more than 1000 mm
  • “bent part” means a part having an average curvature radius of 1000 mm or less.
  • the roughness of the first bottom surface portion, the second bottom surface portion, and the first main surface and the second main surface of the printed layer in the thin portion of the cover member is not limited to the arithmetic average roughness Ra as described above.
  • Ra arithmetic average roughness
  • Rq root mean square roughness
  • 0.3 nm or more and 100 nm or less is preferable.
  • Rq is 100 nm or less
  • Rq is 0.3 nm or more
  • the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
  • the maximum height roughness Rz 0.5 nm or more and 300 nm or less is preferable.
  • Rz is 300 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rz is 0.5 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
  • Rt In the case of the maximum section height roughness Rt, 1 nm or more and 500 nm or less are preferable. When Rt is 500 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rt is 1 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved. In the case of the maximum peak height Rp, 0.3 nm or more and 500 nm or less are preferable. When Rp is 500 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness. When Rp is 0.3 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
  • Rv In the case of the maximum valley depth roughness Rv, 0.3 nm or more and 500 nm or less are preferable. When Rv is 500 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rv is 0.3 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
  • the average length roughness Rsm 0.3 nm to 1000 nm is preferable.
  • Rsm is 1000 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rsm is 0.3 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
  • the kurtosis roughness is Rku, it is preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. When Rku is 3 or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness. When Rku is 1 or more, the coefficient of friction of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
  • waviness such as Wa and express roughness.
  • the skewness roughness Rsk is preferably ⁇ 1 or more and 1 or less from the viewpoint of uniformity such as visibility and touch.
  • cover member of the present invention is not particularly limited. Specific examples include transparent parts for vehicles (headlight covers, side mirrors, front transparent boards, side transparent boards, rear transparent boards, instrument panel surfaces, etc.), meters, architectural windows, show windows, and architectural interior members.
  • Exterior materials for buildings, displays (notebook computers, monitors, LCDs, PDPs, ELDs, CRTs, PDAs, etc.), LCD color filters, touch panel substrates, pickup lenses, optical lenses, eyeglass lenses, camera parts, video parts, CCDs Cover substrates, optical fiber end faces, projector parts, copier parts, transparent substrates for solar cells (cover members, etc.), mobile phone windows, backlight unit parts (light guide plates, cold cathode tubes, etc.), backlight unit parts LCD brightness enhancement film (prism, transflective film, etc.), LCD brightness enhancement film Lum, organic EL light-emitting element parts, inorganic EL light-emitting element parts, phosphor light-emitting element parts, optical filters, end faces of optical parts, illumination lamps, lighting fixture covers, amplified laser light sources, antireflection films, polarizing films, agricultural films Etc.
  • the article of the present invention includes the cover member.
  • the article of the present invention may be composed of the cover member, or may further include a member other than the cover member.
  • Examples of the article of the present invention include those mentioned above as applications of the cover member, and devices including any one or more of them.
  • Examples of the device include a portable information terminal, a display device, a lighting device, and a solar cell module.
  • the article of the present invention is suitable for a portable information terminal and a display device because a concave portion is obtained and sensing sensitivity and visibility are good.
  • a plurality of large concave portions are required for a cover member used for in-vehicle use, and high sensing sensitivity is required when a sensor is arranged.
  • a concave portion may be required for the cover member having a bent shape.
  • the present invention can provide a cover member that can satisfy these requirements. From the above, the cover member of the present invention is suitable as a vehicle-mounted cover member.
  • the article of the present invention when the article of the present invention is a display device, the article of the present invention includes a display panel for displaying an image and a cover member of the present invention provided on the viewing side of the display device body.
  • the display panel include a liquid crystal panel, an organic EL (electroluminescence) panel, and a plasma display panel.
  • the cover member may be provided integrally with the display panel as a protective plate of the display device, and a sensor such as a touch panel sensor is disposed on the second main surface of the display panel, that is, display is performed between the cover member and the sensor. It is good also as a structure with a panel. Moreover, you may arrange
  • a cover member capable of exhibiting a desired sensing capability
  • a portable information terminal or display device having the cover member, a glass substrate for extracting a plurality of cover members, and simple Cover member and glass substrate manufacturing method can be provided.
  • second bottom surface portion 18A, 18B, 18D, 18E, 18F, 18H, 118 ... first 2 connection surface portions, 21, 21A, 21B, 21C, 21D, 21E, 21F, 21H, 121... Thin portions, 22, 22A, 22B, 22C, 22D, 22E, 22F, 122. .

Abstract

A cover member for protecting an object to be protected, wherein a first recess is provided on a first main surface of the cover member, a second recess is provided on a second main surface at a position corresponding to the first recess, and the first recess is equipped with a first bottom surface section formed in a curved shape. Thus, excellent design properties can be provided, various devices such as sensors can easily be incorporated, and the position thereof can easily be recognized.

Description

カバー部材及びその製造方法、並びに携帯情報端末Cover member, method for manufacturing the same, and portable information terminal
 本発明は、カバー部材及びその製造方法、並びに携帯情報端末に関する。 The present invention relates to a cover member, a manufacturing method thereof, and a portable information terminal.
 近年、電子機器類における高度なセキュリティ対策として、指紋を個人の認証に用いる方法が盛んに用いられている。指紋認証の方法には、光学方式、感熱方式、圧力方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式などのセンサを使用しているが、センシング感度や消費電力の観点から静電容量方式、超音波方式のセンサが優れているとされている。 In recent years, a method of using a fingerprint for personal authentication is actively used as an advanced security measure in electronic devices. The fingerprint authentication method uses optical, thermal, pressure, capacitive, and ultrasonic sensors. However, from the viewpoint of sensing sensitivity and power consumption, capacitive and ultrasonic methods. The sensor is said to be excellent.
 例えば、静電容量方式センサは、被検出物が接近、又は、接触した部位の局所的な静電容量の変化を検出する。一般的な静電容量方式センサは、センサ内に配置された電極と被検出物との距離を静電容量の大きさによって測定する。また、超音波方式センサは超音波を用いることで被検出物を三次元で検出できる。この方式では、液体などの異物を透過して検出でき、セキュリティを向上した生体認証センサとして期待されている。このようなセンサを用いた指紋認証機能は、小型軽量で消費電力が低いことから、特にスマートフォンや携帯電話、タブレット型パーソナルコンピューターなどの携帯情報端末(Personal Data Assistance:PDA)に搭載されている。通常、指紋認証用センサ(以下、単にセンサと記載する場合がある)を保護するため、センサの上部にはカバー部材が配置される。 For example, a capacitance type sensor detects a local change in capacitance at a site where an object to be detected approaches or comes into contact. A general electrostatic capacity type sensor measures the distance between an electrode arranged in the sensor and an object to be detected based on the size of the electrostatic capacity. The ultrasonic sensor can detect an object to be detected in three dimensions by using ultrasonic waves. This method is expected as a biometric authentication sensor that can detect a foreign substance such as a liquid by transmitting it and improve security. Since the fingerprint authentication function using such a sensor is small and light and has low power consumption, it is particularly mounted on a personal information terminal (PDA) such as a smartphone, a mobile phone, or a tablet personal computer. Usually, in order to protect a fingerprint authentication sensor (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a sensor), a cover member is disposed above the sensor.
 通常、静電容量方式センサを保護するため、センサの上部には保護カバーが配置される。例えば、特許文献1の静電容量方式センサパッケージングでは、センサが対象物を検出できるカバー部材に孔を設け、当該孔にセンサカバーを配置することが開示されている。 Normally, a protective cover is arranged on the top of the sensor to protect the capacitive sensor. For example, in the capacitive sensor packaging of Patent Document 1, it is disclosed that a hole is provided in a cover member that allows a sensor to detect an object, and a sensor cover is disposed in the hole.
 特許文献2には、携帯機器用カバー部材として、文字又は図形を利用者に認識させるための凹部がカバー部材の主表面に形成されている。ここで、凹部のヘイズ値(曇り度)を高くすることにより、凹部の視認性を向上させている。また、凹部の表面粗さRaを主表面平坦部の表面粗さRaよりも大きくしている。これにより、凹部と主表面平坦部との手触りの差によって、凹部を認識させる触覚性を向上させている。 In Patent Document 2, as a cover member for a portable device, a concave portion for allowing a user to recognize a character or a figure is formed on the main surface of the cover member. Here, the visibility of the recess is improved by increasing the haze value (cloudiness) of the recess. Further, the surface roughness Ra of the recesses is made larger than the surface roughness Ra of the main surface flat portion. Thereby, the tactile sensation for recognizing the concave portion is improved by the difference in touch between the concave portion and the main surface flat portion.
国際公開第2013/173773号公報International Publication No. 2013/173773 日本国特開2013-137383号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-137383
 しかしながら、特許文献1に記載された発明のように、カバー部材に孔を設け、当該孔にセンサカバーを配置する構成では、センサカバーを孔に固定する治具等が必要となるため、部品点数が多くなり、組立工程も複雑化してしまう。また、カバー部材の他にセンサカバー等の異種材料が必要となるため、材料的な統一感を実現することが困難であり、意匠性に劣っていた。 However, in the configuration in which a hole is provided in the cover member and the sensor cover is disposed in the hole as in the invention described in Patent Document 1, a jig or the like for fixing the sensor cover to the hole is required. As a result, the assembly process becomes complicated. Moreover, since a different material such as a sensor cover is required in addition to the cover member, it is difficult to achieve a material sense of unity and the design is poor.
 また、例えば、特許文献2の携帯機器用カバー部材においては、カバー部材表面に凹部を形成することが開示されているが、文字又は図形を利用者に認識させるため、凹部表面を粗らしたものであり、凹部反対面にセンサを配置することは意図されていない。仮に、特許文献2の携帯機器用カバー部材において、凹部と対応する位置にセンサを配置した場合、凹部のヘイズ値が高く、凹部の表面粗さRaが大きいため不都合が生じる。すなわち、凹部の表面が粗れているため、センサ電極と被検出物との距離が不均一になり、検出される静電容量も不均一になってしまう。この場合、センサ感度が低下してしまい、所望の機能を発揮できない可能性がある。 Further, for example, in the cover member for a portable device disclosed in Patent Document 2, it is disclosed that a recess is formed on the surface of the cover member, but the surface of the recess is roughened so that a user can recognize characters or figures. It is not intended to place the sensor on the opposite surface of the recess. Temporarily, in the cover member for portable devices of patent document 2, when a sensor is arrange | positioned in the position corresponding to a recessed part, since the haze value of a recessed part is high and the surface roughness Ra of a recessed part is large, a problem arises. That is, since the surface of the recess is rough, the distance between the sensor electrode and the object to be detected becomes non-uniform and the detected capacitance becomes non-uniform. In this case, the sensor sensitivity is lowered, and there is a possibility that a desired function cannot be exhibited.
 本発明の目的は、意匠性に優れ、且つ、センサ等の各種装置を容易に組み込め、その位置を容易に認識できるカバー部材、及びこれを有する携帯情報端末、並びにカバー部材の製造方法を提供することにある。 An object of the present invention is to provide a cover member that is excellent in design and that can easily incorporate various devices such as sensors and that can easily recognize the position thereof, a portable information terminal having the cover member, and a method of manufacturing the cover member. There is.
 本発明のカバー部材は、保護対象を保護するカバー部材であって、前記カバー部材の第1の主面には、第1の凹部が設けられ、第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置には、第2の凹部が設けられ、前記第1の凹部は、曲面状に形成された第1の底面部を備えていることを特徴とする。
 本発明によれば、第2の凹部にセンサ等の装置を配置した場合、第1の凹部と第2の凹部とで挟まれる部分によって当該装置を保護できるので、上記特許文献1と異なりセンサカバー等の異種材料を併用することなく、材料的に一様で統一感のある意匠性に優れたカバー部材を実現できる。また、部材点数が少なく済み、組立工程を簡略化できるので、コストを削減できる。さらに、第2の凹部にセンサ等の装置を配置した場合、第2の凹部に対向する第1の凹部がカバー部材の表面に設けられているので、当該装置の位置を視覚や触覚等により容易に認識できる。特に、第1の凹部における第1の底面部を曲面状に形成したため、当該第1の底面部を第1の主面と同じ平面状に形成する場合と比べて、装置の位置を触覚により容易に認識できる。また、センサ等の装置を利用者に認識させるために、第1の凹部を粗らす必要がないため、センサ電極と被検出物との距離を均一にでき、センサ感度の低下を抑制できる。
The cover member of the present invention is a cover member that protects an object to be protected, the first main surface of the cover member being provided with a first recess, and the first recess on the second main surface. A second recess is provided at a corresponding position, and the first recess has a first bottom surface formed in a curved shape.
According to the present invention, when a device such as a sensor is arranged in the second recess, the device can be protected by a portion sandwiched between the first recess and the second recess. Thus, it is possible to realize a cover member that is uniform in material and has a sense of unity and is excellent in design without using different materials such as the above. Moreover, since the number of members is small and the assembly process can be simplified, the cost can be reduced. Further, when a device such as a sensor is disposed in the second recess, the first recess facing the second recess is provided on the surface of the cover member, so that the position of the device can be easily detected visually or by touch. Can be recognized. In particular, since the first bottom surface portion in the first recess is formed in a curved shape, the position of the device can be easily detected by tactile sensation as compared to the case where the first bottom surface portion is formed in the same plane as the first main surface. Can be recognized. In addition, since it is not necessary to roughen the first recess in order for the user to recognize a device such as a sensor, the distance between the sensor electrode and the object to be detected can be made uniform, and a decrease in sensor sensitivity can be suppressed.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記第1の底面部は、前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状であり、前記第1の凹部は、当該第1の凹部の開口縁と前記第1の底面部の外縁とを接続する第1の接続面部を備えていることが好ましい。
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記第1の底面部は、前記第2の主面側に突出する曲面状であることが好ましい。
 本発明のこの態様では、利用者の指が第1の底面部に密着しやすくなり、装置認識時の違和感を低減できる。
In the cover member of the present invention, the first bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the first main surface side, and the first recess portion includes an opening edge of the first recess portion and the first recess portion. It is preferable that a first connection surface portion that connects the outer edge of the bottom surface portion is provided.
In the cover member of the present invention, it is preferable that the first bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface side.
In this aspect of the present invention, the user's finger can be in close contact with the first bottom surface, and the uncomfortable feeling during device recognition can be reduced.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記カバー部材の厚さ方向の断面視における前記第1の底面部の両端を結ぶ直線を第1の基準線L1、前記第1の基準線L1から最も離れた前記第1の底面部上の点を第1の点A1とした場合、前記第1の基準線L1から前記第1の点A1までの距離H1が5μm以上であることが好ましい。
 本発明の上記の態様では、利用者が第1の底面部に接触しやすくなり、装置の位置をさらに容易に認識できる。
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記カバー部材の厚さ方向の断面視における前記第1の底面部の両端を結ぶ直線を第1の基準線L1、前記第1の基準線L1から最も離れた前記第1の底面部上の点を第1の点A1、前記第2の凹部における前記第1の点A1に対応する点を対応点B2とした場合、前記第1の主面から前記第1の点A1までの深さJ1と前記第2の主面から前記対応点B2までの深さJ2との差の絶対値が0.1μm以上であることが好ましい。
In the cover member of the present invention, a straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface portion in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a first reference line L1 and the first reference line L1 farthest from the first reference line L1. When the point on the bottom surface of 1 is the first point A1, it is preferable that the distance H1 from the first reference line L1 to the first point A1 is 5 μm or more.
In the above aspect of the present invention, the user can easily come into contact with the first bottom surface portion, and the position of the apparatus can be recognized more easily.
In the cover member of the present invention, a straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface portion in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a first reference line L1 and the first reference line L1 farthest from the first reference line L1. When the point on the bottom surface of 1 is the first point A1, and the point corresponding to the first point A1 in the second recess is the corresponding point B2, the first point from the first main surface The absolute value of the difference between the depth J1 up to A1 and the depth J2 from the second main surface to the corresponding point B2 is preferably 0.1 μm or more.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記第2の凹部における前記第1の底面部に対応する位置には、曲面状の第2の底面部が設けられていることが好ましい。
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記第2の底面部は、前記第2の主面側に突出する曲面状であり、前記第2の凹部は、当該第2の凹部の開口縁と前記第2の底面部の外縁とを接続する第2の接続面部を備えていることが好ましい。
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記第2の底面部は、前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状であることが好ましい。
In the cover member of the present invention, it is preferable that a curved second bottom surface portion is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion in the second recess.
In the cover member of the present invention, the second bottom surface portion has a curved shape protruding toward the second main surface side, and the second recess portion includes an opening edge of the second recess portion and the second recess portion. It is preferable to include a second connection surface portion that connects the outer edge of the bottom surface portion.
In the cover member of the present invention, it is preferable that the second bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the first main surface side.
 本発明の上記の態様では、カバー部材の厚さ方向中心に対して、第2の凹部の形状を第1の凹部と対称的に形成すれば、第1の主面側、第2の主面側のどちらに保護対象を設けても同じように保護でき、カバー部材の管理や設置作業が容易になる。
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記カバー部材の厚さ方向の断面視における前記第2の底面部の両端を結ぶ直線を第2の基準線L2、前記第2の基準線L2から最も離れた前記第2の底面部上の点を第2の点A2とした場合、前記第2の基準線L2から前記第2の点A2までの距離H2が5μm以上であることが好ましい。
In the above aspect of the present invention, if the shape of the second recess is formed symmetrically with the first recess with respect to the center in the thickness direction of the cover member, the first main surface side, the second main surface It can be protected in the same way regardless of which side the protection object is provided, and management and installation work of the cover member becomes easy.
In the cover member of the present invention, a straight line connecting both ends of the second bottom surface portion in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a second reference line L2 and the second reference line L2 farthest from the second reference line L2. 2 is a second point A2, it is preferable that a distance H2 from the second reference line L2 to the second point A2 is 5 μm or more.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記第2の凹部における前記第1の底面部に対応する位置には、前記第1の底面部と同じ方向に曲面状に突出する第2の底面部が形成され、当該第2の底面部と前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部が構成されることが好ましい。
 本発明のこの態様では、第1の底面部と第2の底面部とが重なる箇所でのお互いの接線はほぼ平行となり薄肉部の厚さがある範囲内に収まる。そのため例えば静電容量式センサを配置した場合に、良好なセンシング感度が得られる。
In the cover member of the present invention, a second bottom surface portion protruding in a curved shape in the same direction as the first bottom surface portion is formed at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion in the second recess, It is preferable that a thin part is comprised by the area | region pinched | interposed by the said 2nd bottom face part and said 1st bottom face part.
In this aspect of the present invention, the tangent lines at the portion where the first bottom surface portion and the second bottom surface portion overlap with each other are substantially parallel and fall within a certain range of the thickness of the thin portion. Therefore, for example, when a capacitive sensor is arranged, good sensing sensitivity can be obtained.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記カバー部材の平面視において前記第1の凹部が前記第2の凹部と重なることが好ましい。
 本発明のこの態様では、第1の凹部と第2の凹部とが設けられたガラス基板を化学強化するに際し、平面視における第1,第2の凹部の形状を適切な位置関係に形成するだけで第1の底面部が曲面状のカバー部材を得られる。
In the cover member of the present invention, it is preferable that the first recess overlaps the second recess in a plan view of the cover member.
In this aspect of the present invention, when chemically strengthening the glass substrate provided with the first concave portion and the second concave portion, only the shapes of the first and second concave portions in a plan view are formed in an appropriate positional relationship. Thus, a cover member having a curved first surface is obtained.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記カバー部材の平面視における前記第1の凹部の重心位置と前記第2の凹部の重心位置との距離が100μm以下であることが好ましい。
 本発明のこの態様では、平面視における第1,第2の凹部の位置ずれが小さくなり、良好な外観を得られる。
In the cover member of the present invention, it is preferable that the distance between the center of gravity of the first recess and the center of gravity of the second recess in a plan view of the cover member is 100 μm or less.
In this aspect of the present invention, the positional deviation of the first and second recesses in plan view is reduced, and a good appearance can be obtained.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記第1の主面および前記第2の主面におけるカリウムイオン濃度が前記カバー部材の厚さ方向中央におけるカリウムイオン濃度よりも高いことが好ましい。
 本発明のこの態様によれば、強度が高いカバー部材を得られる。
In the cover member of the present invention, it is preferable that the potassium ion concentration in the first main surface and the second main surface is higher than the potassium ion concentration in the center in the thickness direction of the cover member.
According to this aspect of the present invention, a cover member having high strength can be obtained.
 本発明のカバー部材において、前記保護対象は、携帯情報端末であることが好ましい。
 本発明の携帯情報端末は、上述のカバー部材を有する。
 本発明の上記の態様によれば、カバー部材で保護された携帯情報端末を得られる。
The cover member of this invention WHEREIN: It is preferable that the said protection object is a portable information terminal.
The portable information terminal of the present invention has the above-described cover member.
According to the above aspect of the present invention, a portable information terminal protected by a cover member can be obtained.
 本発明のカバー部材の製造方法は、保護対象を保護するカバー部材をガラス基板から製造するカバー部材の製造方法であって、前記ガラス基板の第1の主面に第1の凹部を形成するとともに、第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置に第2の凹部を形成し、前記第1の凹部および前記第2の凹部が形成された前記ガラス基板を化学強化し、前記凹部を形成する際に、前記第1の凹部が、平面状の第1の底面部を備え、前記第2の凹部が、前記第1の底面部に対応する位置に設けられ、前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部を構成する平面状の第2の底面部を備え、平面視において前記第1の凹部が前記第2の凹部と重なるように処理を行うことを特徴とする。 The cover member manufacturing method of the present invention is a cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member that protects an object to be protected from a glass substrate, and the first concave portion is formed on the first main surface of the glass substrate. Forming a second recess at a position corresponding to the first recess on the second main surface, chemically strengthening the glass substrate on which the first recess and the second recess are formed, and the recess When the first concave portion is formed, the first concave portion includes a flat first bottom surface portion, the second concave portion is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion, and the first bottom surface portion is formed. A planar second bottom surface portion constituting a thin portion is formed by a region sandwiched between the first portion and the second concave portion, and the processing is performed so that the first concave portion overlaps the second concave portion in plan view.
 本発明のカバー部材の製造方法は、保護対象を保護するカバー部材をガラス基板から製造するカバー部材の製造方法であって、前記ガラス基板の第1の主面に第1の凹部を形成するとともに、第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置に第2の凹部を形成し、前記第1の凹部および前記第2の凹部が形成された前記ガラス基板を化学強化し、前記凹部を形成する際に、前記第1の凹部が、平面状の第1の底面部と、前記第1の凹部の開口縁と前記第1の底面部の外縁とを接続する第1の接続面部とを備え、前記第2の凹部が、前記第1の底面部に対応する位置に設けられ、前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部を構成する平面状の第2の底面部と、前記第2の凹部の開口縁と前記第2の底面部の外縁とを接続する第2の接続面部とを備え、前記第1の底面部の深さと前記第2の底面部の深さとが異なるように処理を行うことを特徴とする。
 本発明の上記の態様によれば、ガラス基板を化学強化するだけで第1,第2の底面部が第1の主面側又は第2の主面側に曲面状に曲がったカバー部材を得られる。
The cover member manufacturing method of the present invention is a cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member that protects an object to be protected from a glass substrate, and the first concave portion is formed on the first main surface of the glass substrate. Forming a second recess at a position corresponding to the first recess on the second main surface, chemically strengthening the glass substrate on which the first recess and the second recess are formed, and the recess When the first recess is formed, the first recess has a planar first bottom surface portion, and a first connection surface portion that connects the opening edge of the first recess and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion. The second recess is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion, and a planar second bottom surface portion constituting a thin portion by a region sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion and A second contact connecting the opening edge of the second recess and the outer edge of the second bottom surface portion. And a surface portion, and performs the first depth of the depth and the second bottom surface portion of the bottom portion is different so treated.
According to the above aspect of the present invention, it is possible to obtain a cover member in which the first and second bottom surface portions are curved in a curved shape on the first main surface side or the second main surface side only by chemically strengthening the glass substrate. It is done.
 本発明のカバー部材の製造方法は、保護対象を保護するカバー部材をガラス基板から製造するカバー部材の製造方法であって、前記ガラス基板の第1の主面に第1の凹部を形成するとともに、第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置に第2の凹部を形成し、前記凹部を形成する際に、前記第1の凹部が、前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状の第1の底面部を備え、前記第2の凹部が、前記第1の底面部に対応する位置において前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状に形成し、前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部を構成する第2の底面部を備えるように処理を行うことを特徴とする。
 本発明のこの態様によれば、ガラス基板を化学強化することなく、第1,第2の底面部が第1の主面側に曲面状に曲がったカバー部材を得られる。
The cover member manufacturing method of the present invention is a cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member that protects an object to be protected from a glass substrate, and the first concave portion is formed on the first main surface of the glass substrate. The second recess is formed at a position corresponding to the first recess on the second main surface, and the first recess protrudes toward the first main surface when the recess is formed. A first bottom surface having a curved shape, wherein the second recess is formed in a curved shape protruding toward the first main surface at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface; The processing is performed so as to include a second bottom surface portion that constitutes a thin-walled portion by a region sandwiched between the portions.
According to this aspect of the present invention, it is possible to obtain a cover member in which the first and second bottom surface portions are curved in a curved shape toward the first main surface without chemically strengthening the glass substrate.
本発明の一実施形態に係るカバー部材の構成を示し、(A)は厚さ方向の断面図、(B)は第1の主面側からの平面図、(C)は第2の主面側からの平面図。The structure of the cover member which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is shown, (A) is sectional drawing of thickness direction, (B) is a top view from the 1st main surface side, (C) is the 2nd main surface. The top view from the side. (A)は図1(B)のIIA-IIA線に沿う断面図、(B)は図1(B)のIIB-IIB線に沿う断面図。FIG. 2A is a cross-sectional view taken along line IIA-IIA in FIG. 1B, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view taken along line IIB-IIB in FIG. センサを配置したカバー部材の断面図。Sectional drawing of the cover member which has arrange | positioned the sensor. (A)は他の例におけるカバー部材の断面図、(B)はさらに他の例におけるセンサを配置したカバー部材の断面図。(A) is sectional drawing of the cover member in another example, (B) is sectional drawing of the cover member which has arrange | positioned the sensor in another example. (A),(B)はそれぞれさらに他の例におけるセンサを配置したカバー部材の断面図。(A), (B) is sectional drawing of the cover member which has arrange | positioned the sensor in another example, respectively. (A)~(C)はさらに他の例におけるカバー部材の断面図。(A)-(C) are sectional views of a cover member in still another example. カバー部材の製造方法の説明図であり、(A)カバー部材の第1の主面側からの平面図、(B)は第1,第2のマスク部材の平面図、(C)は平板状の薄肉部を備えたカバー部材の断面図。It is explanatory drawing of the manufacturing method of a cover member, (A) The top view from the 1st main surface side of a cover member, (B) is a top view of the 1st, 2nd mask member, (C) is flat form Sectional drawing of the cover member provided with this thin part. 異なる条件で化学強化した場合のCS-DOLプロファイルをそれぞれ示す図。The figure which shows each CS-DOL profile at the time of chemically strengthening on different conditions. 異なる条件で二段階の化学強化を実施した場合のCS-DOLプロファイルを示す図。The figure which shows the CS-DOL profile at the time of implementing a two-step chemical strengthening on different conditions. 交点Qの求め方の説明図。Explanatory drawing of how to obtain intersection Q. 筐体に組み込まれたカバー部材の断面図。Sectional drawing of the cover member integrated in the housing | casing. 防眩処理層を施したカバー部材を示し、(A)は平面図、(B)はB-B線に沿う断面図、(C)はB-B線に沿う他の例の断面図。The cover member which gave the glare-proof process layer is shown, (A) is a top view, (B) is sectional drawing which follows the BB line, (C) is sectional drawing of the other example which follows the BB line. 防眩処理層を施した他の例のカバー部材を示し、(A)は平面図、(B)はB-B線に沿う断面図、(C)はB-B線に沿う他の例の断面図。The cover member of the other example which gave the glare-proof process layer is shown, (A) is a top view, (B) is sectional drawing which follows the BB line, (C) is another example along the BB line. Sectional drawing. (A)~(D)はそれぞれ防指紋コート層を施したカバー部材の断面図。FIGS. 4A to 4D are cross-sectional views of cover members each provided with a fingerprint-proof coating layer. (A)~(D)はそれぞれ防指紋コート層を施した他の例のカバー部材の断面図。FIGS. 4A to 4D are cross-sectional views of cover members of other examples each provided with a fingerprint-proof coating layer. (A)、(B)はそれぞれ印刷層が設けられたカバー部材の断面図。(A), (B) is sectional drawing of the cover member in which the printing layer was provided, respectively. 複数のカバー部材を得られるガラス基板の平面図。The top view of the glass substrate from which a some cover member is obtained. (A)は図17のXVIIIA部分の拡大図、(B)はXVIIIB部分の拡大図。(A) is an enlarged view of the XVIIIA part of FIG. 17, (B) is an enlarged view of the XVIIIB part. (A)はガラス基板の平面図、(B)は他の例の第1,第2のマスク部材の平面図。(A) is a top view of a glass substrate, (B) is a top view of the 1st, 2nd mask member of another example. (A)はさらに他の例の第1,第2のマスク部材の平面図、(B)は(A)の第1,第2のマスク部材を用いた処理により得られたガラス基板平面図。(A) is a top view of the 1st, 2nd mask member of further another example, (B) is a glass substrate top view obtained by the process using the 1st, 2nd mask member of (A). 他の例のガラス基板の平面図。The top view of the glass substrate of another example. (A)~(D)は実施例3におけるカバー部材に印刷層を形成する順序の説明図であり、カバー部材を第2の主面側から見た図。(A)-(D) are explanatory drawings of the order which forms a printing layer in the cover member in Example 3, and is the figure which looked at the cover member from the 2nd main surface side. 実施例6における携帯情報端末の断面図。Sectional drawing of the portable information terminal in Example 6. FIG. (A)~(D)は、実施例7における化学強化シミュレーション前の例1~4のカバー部材の断面図。FIGS. 7A to 7D are cross-sectional views of cover members of Examples 1 to 4 before a chemical strengthening simulation in Example 7. FIGS. 実施例7における化学強化シミュレーション後のカバー部材の断面図。Sectional drawing of the cover member after the chemical strengthening simulation in Example 7. FIG.
 以下、本発明の一実施形態について説明するが、本発明は以下の実施形態に限定されることはない。また、本発明の範囲を逸脱することなく、以下の実施形態に種々の変形及び置換等を加えられる。 Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described, but the present invention is not limited to the following embodiment. Various modifications and substitutions can be made to the following embodiments without departing from the scope of the present invention.
(カバー部材の構成)
 本実施形態に係るカバー部材は、任意の保護対象を保護するために用いられる。以下、カバー部材の保護対象はスマートフォン等の携帯情報端末であるとして説明するが、保護対象としては任意の対象が適用可能である。例えば液晶パネルやELパネル等の表示パネルと組み合わせた表示装置に適用できる。特に車載用ディスプレイ用の大型カバー部材を効率的に作製できる方法としても優れている。
(Configuration of cover member)
The cover member which concerns on this embodiment is used in order to protect arbitrary protection objects. Hereinafter, the protection target of the cover member will be described as being a mobile information terminal such as a smartphone, but any target can be applied as the protection target. For example, the present invention can be applied to a display device combined with a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel or an EL panel. In particular, it is also excellent as a method for efficiently producing a large cover member for a vehicle-mounted display.
 図1(A)~(C)に示すように、本実施形態のカバー部材1は、全体として平板状の略直方体であり、図1(A)の上側の第1の主面3と、第1の主面3に対向する図1(A)の下側の第2の主面5と、を有する。本実施形態において、第1の主面とは、カバー部材1を含む組立体(アセンブリ)の外側の面、すなわち通常の使用状態において使用者が触れられる面をいう。また、第2の主面とは、組立体の内側の面、すなわち通常の使用状態において使用者が触れられない面をいう。また、以下の説明において、カバー部材1の長手方向をX方向とし、短手方向をY方向とし、厚み方向をZ方向とする。
 なお、カバー部材1は、屈曲部を1つ以上有するガラスでもよい。また、第1の主面が使用者に触れられない面で、第2の主面が使用者に触れられる面であってもよい。
As shown in FIGS. 1 (A) to 1 (C), the cover member 1 of the present embodiment is a substantially flat rectangular parallelepiped as a whole, and includes a first main surface 3 on the upper side of FIG. 1 and the second main surface 5 on the lower side of FIG. In the present embodiment, the first main surface refers to an outer surface of an assembly (assembly) including the cover member 1, that is, a surface that can be touched by a user in a normal use state. The second main surface means an inner surface of the assembly, that is, a surface that cannot be touched by the user in a normal use state. In the following description, the longitudinal direction of the cover member 1 is the X direction, the short direction is the Y direction, and the thickness direction is the Z direction.
The cover member 1 may be glass having one or more bent portions. Further, the first main surface may be a surface that cannot be touched by the user, and the second main surface may be a surface that can be touched by the user.
 カバー部材1の第1の主面3には、少なくとも一つの第1の凹部7が設けられている。カバー部材1の第2の主面5における第1の凹部7に対応する位置には、第2の凹部14が設けられている。図1(A)~(C)には、カバー部材1の第1,第2の主面3,5に、それぞれ一つずつの第1,第2の凹部7,14が設けられた例が示されている。第1,第2の凹部7,14は、カバー部材1のX方向端部近傍で且つY方向中央部近傍に形成される。第1,第2の凹部7,14は、-Z方向、+Z方向からそれぞれ見たとき、Y方向の長さがX方向よりも長い長円状に形成されている。
 なお、第1,第2の凹部7,14が形成される位置は、両者がZ方向に対向して(XY平面において重なって、すなわち平面視において第1の凹部7と第2の凹部14が重なって)いる限り、任意の位置に設定して構わない。カバー部材1の平面視における第1の凹部7の重心位置と第2の凹部14の重心位置との距離は、第1,第2の凹部7,14の位置ずれを目立たなくなるようにするために、100μm以下であることが好ましい。カバー部材1が屈曲部を1つ以上有する場合、この屈曲部に第1,第2の凹部7,14が形成されてもよい。また、第1,第2の凹部7,14の数や形状等も任意である。
The first main surface 3 of the cover member 1 is provided with at least one first recess 7. A second recess 14 is provided at a position corresponding to the first recess 7 in the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1. 1A to 1C show an example in which the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 of the cover member 1 are provided with one first and second concave portions 7 and 14, respectively. It is shown. The first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed in the vicinity of the end portion of the cover member 1 in the X direction and in the vicinity of the center portion in the Y direction. The first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed in an oval shape whose length in the Y direction is longer than that in the X direction when viewed from the −Z direction and the + Z direction, respectively.
The positions where the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed are such that they face each other in the Z direction (overlapping in the XY plane, that is, the first recess 7 and the second recess 14 are in plan view). As long as they are overlapped), they can be set at any position. The distance between the position of the center of gravity of the first recess 7 and the position of the center of gravity of the second recess 14 in plan view of the cover member 1 is set so that the positional deviation between the first and second recesses 7 and 14 becomes inconspicuous. 100 μm or less is preferable. When the cover member 1 has one or more bent portions, the first and second concave portions 7 and 14 may be formed in the bent portion. The number and shape of the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are also arbitrary.
 図2(A),(B)にも示すように、第1の凹部7は、第1の主面3側に曲面状に突出する第1の底面部8と、第1の凹部7の開口縁と第1の底面部8の外縁とを接続する第1の接続面部11とを備えている。なお、第1の底面部8の外縁とは、第1の凹部7が第1の接続面部11を備える場合、断面視において第1の主面3側に突出する部分における最も第2の主面5側に位置する部分である。第1の底面部8は、長円状の領域であり、第1の接続面部11は、第1の底面部8を囲む長円環状の領域である。第1の接続面部11は、第1の底面部8と第1の主面3とを滑らかに接続する曲面状(R形状)とされている。 As shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the first concave portion 7 includes a first bottom surface portion 8 projecting in a curved shape on the first main surface 3 side, and an opening of the first concave portion 7. A first connection surface portion 11 that connects the edge and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 8 is provided. In addition, when the 1st recessed part 7 is provided with the 1st connection surface part 11, the outer edge of the 1st bottom face part 8 is the 2nd main surface in the part which protrudes in the 1st main surface 3 side in sectional view. It is a part located on the 5 side. The first bottom surface portion 8 is an oval region, and the first connection surface portion 11 is an oval region surrounding the first bottom surface portion 8. The first connection surface portion 11 has a curved surface shape (R shape) that smoothly connects the first bottom surface portion 8 and the first main surface 3.
 第1の接続面部11の曲率半径は、第1の底面部8側から第1の凹部7の開口縁側に向かうにしたがって大きくなるのが好ましい。この構成により、第1の底面部8と第1の接続面部11との接続部における応力集中が緩和され、強度が向上する。特に、第2の凹部14に指紋認証用センサ40(センサ40)が配置される場合(図3参照)には、認証のたびに薄肉部21に指を押し当てることになるため、上記接続部には繰り返し力がかかるので、形状的にその部分の応力集中を抑制する効果がある。 It is preferable that the curvature radius of the first connection surface portion 11 increases from the first bottom surface portion 8 side toward the opening edge side of the first recess 7. With this configuration, the stress concentration at the connection portion between the first bottom surface portion 8 and the first connection surface portion 11 is relaxed, and the strength is improved. In particular, when the fingerprint authentication sensor 40 (sensor 40) is disposed in the second recess 14 (see FIG. 3), the finger is pressed against the thin portion 21 each time authentication is performed. Since a repetitive force is applied, there is an effect of suppressing stress concentration in that portion in terms of shape.
 第2の凹部14は、第1の主面3側に突出する曲面状の第2の底面部15を構成している。第2の底面部15は、第2の薄肉部構成部分16と、第2の接続部構成部分17とを備えている。第2の薄肉部構成部分16は、平面視で第1の底面部8と重なるように設けられ、第1の底面部8に対応する曲面状に形成されている。第2の接続部構成部分17は、平面視で第1の接続面部11と重なるように設けられ、第2の薄肉部構成部分16の外縁と第2の底面部15の外縁とを接続する。なお、第2の薄肉部構成部分16とは、平面視で第1の底面部8の外縁と重なる部分である。 The second concave portion 14 constitutes a curved second bottom surface portion 15 that protrudes toward the first main surface 3 side. The second bottom surface portion 15 includes a second thin portion constituting portion 16 and a second connecting portion constituting portion 17. The second thin portion constituent portion 16 is provided so as to overlap the first bottom surface portion 8 in plan view, and is formed in a curved shape corresponding to the first bottom surface portion 8. The second connection part component part 17 is provided so as to overlap the first connection surface part 11 in plan view, and connects the outer edge of the second thin part component part 16 and the outer edge of the second bottom surface part 15. Note that the second thin portion constituting portion 16 is a portion overlapping the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 8 in plan view.
 このような第1,第2の凹部7,14が設けられることにより、カバー部材1には、薄肉部21と、厚肉部22と、接続部23とが形成される。薄肉部21は、第1の底面部8と第2の薄肉部構成部分16とで挟まれる曲板状の部分である。厚肉部22は、第1,第2の主面3,5における第1,第2の凹部7,14が設けられていない領域で挟まれる部分である。接続部23は、第1の接続面部11と第2の接続部構成部分17とで挟まれる領域であって、薄肉部21と厚肉部22とを接続する部分である。 By providing the first and second recesses 7 and 14 as described above, the cover member 1 is formed with a thin portion 21, a thick portion 22, and a connection portion 23. The thin portion 21 is a curved plate-like portion sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8 and the second thin portion constituent portion 16. The thick portion 22 is a portion that is sandwiched between regions of the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 where the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are not provided. The connecting portion 23 is a region sandwiched between the first connecting surface portion 11 and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 and is a portion connecting the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22.
 このようなカバー部材1は、携帯情報端末や表示装置の任意の面(例えば前面や側面)を保護するために筐体等に組み込まれる際、第2の凹部14に指紋認証用などのセンサ、や液晶パネルや有機ELパネルなどの表示パネル、照明、カメラ等の各種装置を配置できるので、スペース効率を向上させられる。センサとしては、指紋、虹彩、静脈などの生体認証センサが挙げられ、センシング方式として静電容量式、光学式、赤外線式、超音波式などのセンサが知られており、その他に照度センサ、温度センサ等が挙げられる。ここで、第2の凹部14に組み込んだ装置は、Z方向に対向する薄肉部21によって保護されるので、上述した特許文献1の発明と異なりセンサカバー等の異種材料を併用することなく、材料的に一様で統一感のある意匠性に優れたカバー部材1を実現できる。また、部材点数が少なく済み、組立工程を簡略化できるので、コスト削減にも多大な効果がある。さらに別部材を組み込むためのカバー部材開口が減らせるため、防水・防滴性の付与が容易になる。さらに、厚肉部22が平面形状であるのに対し、表面側から見て薄肉部21が凹入しているため、携帯情報端末の使用者は、薄肉部21の位置、並びに薄肉部21の裏側の各種装置の位置を、視覚や触覚等により容易に認識できる。特に、第1の凹部7における第1の底面部8を第1の主面3側に突出する曲面状に形成したため、各種装置の位置を触覚により容易に認識できる。 When such a cover member 1 is incorporated in a housing or the like in order to protect an arbitrary surface (for example, the front surface or the side surface) of a portable information terminal or a display device, a sensor for fingerprint authentication or the like is provided in the second recess 14. Since various devices such as a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and an organic EL panel, illumination, and a camera can be arranged, space efficiency can be improved. Examples of sensors include biometric sensors such as fingerprints, irises, and veins. Capacitance type, optical type, infrared type, and ultrasonic type sensors are known as sensing methods. A sensor etc. are mentioned. Here, since the device incorporated in the second recess 14 is protected by the thin portion 21 facing in the Z direction, the material can be used without using a different material such as a sensor cover unlike the invention of Patent Document 1 described above. Therefore, it is possible to realize the cover member 1 having a uniform and uniform design and excellent design. Further, since the number of members is small and the assembly process can be simplified, there is a great effect in cost reduction. Furthermore, since the opening of the cover member for incorporating another member can be reduced, waterproof and drip-proofing can be easily provided. Furthermore, since the thick wall portion 22 has a planar shape, the thin wall portion 21 is recessed as viewed from the front surface side, so that the user of the portable information terminal can determine the position of the thin wall portion 21 and the thin wall portion 21. The positions of various devices on the back side can be easily recognized by visual or tactile senses. In particular, since the first bottom surface portion 8 of the first recess 7 is formed in a curved shape protruding toward the first main surface 3, the positions of various devices can be easily recognized by tactile sensation.
 第1,第2の凹部7,14は、研削加工等の機械加工や熱プレスや真空成形等の成形工程によっても設けられるが、エッチングにより設けられることが好ましい。エッチングによれば、微細な傷や欠点が取り除かれ、カバー部材1の強度が向上する。また、エッチングによれば、薄肉部21のZ方向厚さの制御が容易であり、しかも一工程で完了する。
 第1,第2の底面部8,15で挟まれる曲板状の薄肉部21は、研削加工等の機械加工によっても設けられるが、化学強化により設けられることが好ましい。化学強化によれば、第1,第2の凹部7,14の形状差で生じる表面膨張を利用して薄肉部21を反らせ、第1,第2の底面部8,15を曲面状に容易に形成できる。
The first and second recesses 7 and 14 are provided by a machining process such as grinding or a molding process such as hot pressing or vacuum forming, but are preferably provided by etching. According to the etching, fine scratches and defects are removed, and the strength of the cover member 1 is improved. Moreover, according to the etching, it is easy to control the thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction, and it is completed in one step.
The curved plate-like thin portion 21 sandwiched between the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 is provided by mechanical processing such as grinding, but is preferably provided by chemical strengthening. According to the chemical strengthening, the thin wall portion 21 is warped by utilizing the surface expansion caused by the shape difference between the first and second concave portions 7 and 14, and the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 are easily curved. Can be formed.
 なお、図3に示すように、第1の凹部7と第1の主面3との接続部分P1及び第2の凹部14と第2の主面5との接続部分P2も滑らかに連続する曲面状とすることが好ましい。接続部分P1,P2をエッジのない曲面状とすることにより、落下や外部の堅い部材との接触による欠けや破損を生じにくくする効果がある。接続部分P1,P2を滑らかに連続する曲面状とするには、第1,第2の凹部7,14形成後に接続部分P1,P2をバフ研磨等により仕上げられる。しかし、第1,第2の凹部7,14がウェットエッチングによって設けられる場合には、エッチング工程後、ガラス基板をエッチャントから分離しマスクを剥離・洗浄するまでの時間を通常より長く保持することによっても、上記接続部分P1,P2を滑らかに連続する曲面状とできる。エッチングによって形成された第1,第2の凹部7,14とマスクとの境界部分にエッチャントが表面張力により残存し、残存したエッチャントに接する第1,第2の凹部7,14と第1,第2の主面3,5との接続部分P1,P2でわずかながらエッチングが進行するため、接続部分P1,P2のエッジが滑らかな連続曲面となる。そのための保持時間は、使用するエッチャントとガラス基板のエッチング耐性とにより数秒から数十分の間で調整する。 As shown in FIG. 3, the connecting portion P1 between the first concave portion 7 and the first main surface 3 and the connecting portion P2 between the second concave portion 14 and the second main surface 5 are also smoothly continuous curved surfaces. It is preferable to make it into a shape. By making the connecting portions P1 and P2 into a curved surface without edges, there is an effect of making it difficult to cause chipping or breakage due to dropping or contact with an external hard member. In order to make the connecting portions P1 and P2 have a smoothly continuous curved surface shape, the connecting portions P1 and P2 are finished by buffing or the like after the first and second concave portions 7 and 14 are formed. However, when the first and second recesses 7 and 14 are provided by wet etching, the time until the glass substrate is separated from the etchant and the mask is peeled and cleaned after the etching process is maintained longer than usual. In addition, the connecting portions P1 and P2 can be smoothly curved. The etchant remains due to surface tension at the boundary between the first and second recesses 7 and 14 formed by etching and the mask, and the first and second recesses 7 and 14 and the first and first recesses in contact with the remaining etchant. Etching proceeds slightly at the connecting portions P1 and P2 with the main surfaces 3 and 5, so that the edges of the connecting portions P1 and P2 become smooth continuous curved surfaces. The holding time for this is adjusted between several seconds to several tens of minutes depending on the etchant used and the etching resistance of the glass substrate.
 なお、第1,第2の凹部7,14のうち、指を接触させる第1の凹部7は、第1の接続面部11を上述したような滑らかな曲面状とすることが好ましいが、例えば、図4(A)に示すように、第1の凹部7Aを第1の底面部8Aと、Z方向に延びる(XY平面と垂直な)平面状の第1の接続面部11Aとで構成し、第2の凹部14Aを第1の底面部8Aに対応する曲面状の第2の底面部15Aと、Z方向に延びる平面状の第2の接続面部18Aとで構成してもよい。その場合、第1の接続面部11Aと第1の主面3とは互いに垂直に接続され、第2の接続面部18Aと第2の主面5とも互いに垂直に接続される。
 そして、第1の底面部8Aと第2の底面部15Aとで挟まれる部分は、薄肉部21Aを構成する。第1,第2の主面3,5における第1,第2の凹部7A,14Aが設けられていない領域で挟まれる部分は、厚肉部22Aを構成する。
 第1の接続面部11Aの高さT1と第2の接続面部18Aの高さT2とは同じであってもよい。
Of the first and second recesses 7 and 14, it is preferable that the first recess 7 with which the finger is brought into contact has the first connecting surface portion 11 as a smooth curved surface as described above. As shown in FIG. 4A, the first recess 7A is composed of a first bottom surface portion 8A and a planar first connection surface portion 11A extending in the Z direction (perpendicular to the XY plane). The two concave portions 14A may be constituted by a curved second bottom surface portion 15A corresponding to the first bottom surface portion 8A and a planar second connection surface portion 18A extending in the Z direction. In that case, the first connecting surface portion 11A and the first main surface 3 are connected to each other vertically, and the second connecting surface portion 18A and the second main surface 5 are also connected to each other vertically.
A portion sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8A and the second bottom surface portion 15A constitutes a thin portion 21A. A portion sandwiched between regions where the first and second concave portions 7A and 14A are not provided in the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 constitutes a thick portion 22A.
The height T1 of the first connection surface portion 11A and the height T2 of the second connection surface portion 18A may be the same.
 本実施形態のように、第2の凹部14にセンサ40が配置される場合、薄肉部21を構成する第1の底面部8の算術平均粗さRaは、50nm以下が好ましく、45nm以下がより好ましく、30nm以下がさらに好ましい。静電容量方式センサや超音波方式センサ等のセンサ40は、図3に示すように、接着層41を介して第2の凹部14(薄肉部21を構成する第2の底面部15)に配置されると共に、第1の底面部8に当接した被検出物(例えば指)を検出する。なお、センサ40が筐体等に固定される場合には、上記接着層41を設けなくても良い。したがって、第1の底面部8の算術平均粗さRaが50nm以下であると、指の指紋の凹凸の程度と比べて十分に小さくなるため、センシング感度が高くなる点で好ましい。また、このような構成においては、表示装置や携帯情報端末の使用者は、第1の凹部7によって、薄肉部21の位置及び薄肉部21の第2の凹部14側に配置されたセンサ40の位置を、視覚や触覚等により容易に認識できる。また、第1の底面部8の算術平均粗さRaの下限は、特に限定されないが、好ましくは2nm以上であり、より好ましくは4nm以上である。なお、第1の底面部8の算術平均粗さRaは、研磨砥粒や研磨方法等の選択により調整できる。
 算術平均粗さRaは、日本工業規格 JIS B0601に基づいて測定できる。
When the sensor 40 is disposed in the second recess 14 as in the present embodiment, the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 constituting the thin portion 21 is preferably 50 nm or less, and more preferably 45 nm or less. Preferably, it is 30 nm or less. As shown in FIG. 3, the sensor 40 such as a capacitive sensor or an ultrasonic sensor is disposed in the second recess 14 (the second bottom surface portion 15 constituting the thin portion 21) via the adhesive layer 41. At the same time, an object to be detected (for example, a finger) in contact with the first bottom surface portion 8 is detected. When the sensor 40 is fixed to a housing or the like, the adhesive layer 41 may not be provided. Therefore, it is preferable that the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 is 50 nm or less because the sensing sensitivity is increased because the arithmetic average roughness Ra is sufficiently smaller than the degree of unevenness of the fingerprint of the finger. Further, in such a configuration, the user of the display device or the portable information terminal uses the first recess 7 to detect the position of the thin portion 21 and the sensor 40 disposed on the second recess 14 side of the thin portion 21. The position can be easily recognized visually or by touch. Further, the lower limit of the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 nm or more, and more preferably 4 nm or more. The arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first bottom surface portion 8 can be adjusted by selection of polishing abrasive grains, a polishing method, and the like.
The arithmetic average roughness Ra can be measured based on Japanese Industrial Standard JIS B0601.
 図3に示すように、センサ40が接着層41を介して第2の凹部14に配置される場合、センサ40の裏面が第2の主面5から突出しないことが好ましい。この場合、第2の凹部14に接着層41とセンサ40とが収納され保護対象と組み合わせやすくなる。 As shown in FIG. 3, when the sensor 40 is disposed in the second recess 14 via the adhesive layer 41, it is preferable that the back surface of the sensor 40 does not protrude from the second main surface 5. In this case, the adhesive layer 41 and the sensor 40 are housed in the second recess 14 and can be easily combined with the protection target.
 薄肉部21を構成する第2の底面部15の算術平均粗さRaは、より好適には第1の底面部8と同様に、50nm以下が好ましく、45nm以下がより好ましく、30nm以下がさらに好ましい。第2の底面部15の算術平均粗さRaが50nm以下であると、指の指紋の凹凸の程度と比べて十分に小さくなり、センシング感度が高くなる点で好ましい。 The arithmetic average roughness Ra of the second bottom surface portion 15 constituting the thin wall portion 21 is more preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and even more preferably 30 nm or less, like the first bottom surface portion 8. . When the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the second bottom surface portion 15 is 50 nm or less, it is preferable in that the sensitivity is sufficiently smaller than the degree of unevenness of the fingerprint of the finger and the sensing sensitivity is increased.
 また、図3に示すように、カバー部材1の厚さ方向の断面視における第1の底面部8の両端を結ぶ直線を第1の基準線L1、第1の基準線L1から最も離れた点である第1の底面部8の頂点を第1の点A1とした場合、第1の基準線L1から第1の点A1までの距離H1は5μm以上が好ましい。距離H1を5μm以上にすることで、利用者が第1の底面部8を容易に認識できる。また、第1の底面部8の頂点(第1の点A1)は、第1の主面3よりも下方(カバー部材内部側)に位置することが好ましい。
 さらに、第1の点A1に対応する(薄肉部21における第1の点A1の反対側に位置する)第2の底面部8上の点を対応点B2とした場合、第1の主面3から第1の点A1までの深さJ1と第2の主面5から対応点B2までの深さJ2との差の絶対値が0.1μm以上であることが好ましい。深さJ1と深さJ2との差の絶対値は、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.5μm以上がさらにこのましい。これにより後述の化学強化により薄肉部21を曲面化が顕著となり、使用者が触覚だけで位置を容易に判断できる。
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface portion 8 in the cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member 1 is the point farthest from the first reference line L1 and the first reference line L1. When the vertex of the first bottom surface portion 8 is the first point A1, the distance H1 from the first reference line L1 to the first point A1 is preferably 5 μm or more. By setting the distance H1 to 5 μm or more, the user can easily recognize the first bottom surface portion 8. Moreover, it is preferable that the vertex (1st point A1) of the 1st bottom face part 8 is located below the 1st main surface 3 (cover member inside side).
Furthermore, when the point on the second bottom surface portion 8 corresponding to the first point A1 (located on the opposite side of the first point A1 in the thin portion 21) is the corresponding point B2, the first main surface 3 The absolute value of the difference between the depth J1 from the first principal point A1 to the depth J2 from the second principal surface 5 to the corresponding point B2 is preferably 0.1 μm or more. The absolute value of the difference between the depth J1 and the depth J2 is more preferably 0.2 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.5 μm or more. As a result, the thin-walled portion 21 has a curved surface due to chemical strengthening described later, and the user can easily determine the position only by touch.
 また、図4(B)に示すように、図3に示す構成を上下反転した構成としてもよい。この構成では、第1の凹部7Bの第1の底面部8B、第1の薄肉部構成部分9B、第1の接続部構成部分10Bが、図3における第2の底面部15、第2の薄肉部構成部分16、第2の接続部構成部分17に対応し、第2の凹部14Bの第2の底面部15B、第2の接続面部18Bが、図3における第1の底面部8、第1の接続面部11に対応し、薄肉部21B、厚肉部22B、接続部23Bが設けられる。そして、センサ40Bが薄肉部21Bの第2の凹部14B側に配置される。
 すなわち、第1の底面部8Bは、第2の主面5側に突出する曲面状となる。また、第2の底面部15Bは、第2の主面5側に突出する曲面状となる。第2の凹部14Bは、第2の凹部14Bの開口縁と第2の底面部15Bの外縁とを接続する第2の接続面部18Bを備える。
 この際、カバー部材1の厚さ方向の断面視における第2の底面部15Bの両端を結ぶ直線を第2の基準線L2、第2の基準線L2から最も離れた点である第2の底面部15Bの頂点を第2の点A2とした場合、第2の基準線L2から第2の点A2までの距離H2が5μm以上であることが好ましい。
Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the configuration shown in FIG. In this configuration, the first bottom surface portion 8B, the first thin portion constituent portion 9B, and the first connecting portion constituent portion 10B of the first concave portion 7B are the same as the second bottom portion 15 and the second thin portion in FIG. The second bottom surface portion 15B and the second connection surface portion 18B of the second concave portion 14B correspond to the first bottom surface portion 8 and the first connection portion 18B in FIG. Corresponding to the connection surface portion 11, a thin portion 21B, a thick portion 22B, and a connection portion 23B are provided. The sensor 40B is disposed on the second concave portion 14B side of the thin portion 21B.
That is, the first bottom surface portion 8B has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface 5 side. Further, the second bottom surface portion 15B has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface 5 side. The second recess 14B includes a second connection surface portion 18B that connects the opening edge of the second recess 14B and the outer edge of the second bottom surface portion 15B.
At this time, the second bottom surface that is the point farthest from the second reference line L2 and the second reference line L2 is a straight line connecting both ends of the second bottom surface portion 15B in the sectional view of the cover member 1 in the thickness direction. When the vertex of the part 15B is the second point A2, it is preferable that the distance H2 from the second reference line L2 to the second point A2 is 5 μm or more.
 また、第1,第2の凹部は、同一形状である必要はなく、互いに面積や形成等が異なっていても構わない。これにより、配置されるセンサ等の装置に合わせて、第2の凹部の大きさを適宜変更できる。
 例えば、図5(A)に示すように、第1の主面3の第1の凹部7CのY方向及びX方向の長さを第2の主面5の第2の凹部14CのY方向及びX方向の長さよりも長くして、すなわちカバー部材1の平面視において、第1の凹部7Cの外縁が第2の凹部14Cの外縁より外側に位置するようにしてもよい。
The first and second recesses need not have the same shape, and may have different areas, formations, and the like. Thereby, according to apparatus, such as a sensor arrange | positioned, the magnitude | size of a 2nd recessed part can be changed suitably.
For example, as shown in FIG. 5A, the length of the first recess 7C of the first main surface 3 in the Y direction and the X direction is set to the length of the second recess 14C of the second main surface 5 and You may make it longer than the length of a X direction, ie, the outer edge of the 1st recessed part 7C may be located outside the outer edge of the 2nd recessed part 14C in the planar view of the cover member 1. FIG.
 この場合、第1の凹部7Cは、第1の主面3側に突出する曲面状の第1の底面部8Cと、第1の凹部7Cの開口縁と第1の底面部8Cの外縁とを接続する第1の接続面部11Cを備えている。第1の底面部8Cは、第1の底面部8Cの中央に位置する第1の薄肉部構成部分9Cと、第1の薄肉部構成部分9Cを囲む第1の接続部構成部分10Cとを備えている。
 第2の凹部14Cは、第1の主面3側に突出する曲面状の第2の底面部15Cを備えている。第2の底面部15Cは、第2の薄肉部構成部分16Cと、第2の接続部構成部分17Cとを備えている。第2の薄肉部構成部分16Cは、第1の薄肉部構成部分9Cに対応する曲面状に形成されている。
 そして、第1の薄肉部構成部分9Cと第2の薄肉部構成部分16Cとで挟まれる厚さが一定の曲板状の部分は、薄肉部21Cを構成する。第1,第2の主面3,5における第1,第2の凹部7C,14Cが設けられていない領域で挟まれる部分は、厚肉部22Cを構成する。第2の主面5における第1の接続部構成部分10C及び第1の接続面部11Cと対向する領域を第2の凹部対向部分5Cとした場合、第1の接続部構成部分10C及び第1の接続面部11Cと、第2の接続部構成部分17C及び第2の凹部対向部分5Cとで挟まれる領域は、薄肉部21Cと厚肉部22Cとを接続する接続部23Cを構成する。
In this case, the first concave portion 7C includes a curved first bottom surface portion 8C protruding toward the first main surface 3, the opening edge of the first concave portion 7C, and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 8C. 11C of 1st connection surface parts to connect are provided. The first bottom surface portion 8C includes a first thin portion constituting portion 9C located at the center of the first bottom surface portion 8C, and a first connecting portion constituting portion 10C surrounding the first thin portion constituting portion 9C. ing.
14 C of 2nd recessed parts are provided with the curved 2nd bottom face part 15C which protrudes in the 1st main surface 3 side. The second bottom surface portion 15C includes a second thin portion constituent portion 16C and a second connecting portion constituent portion 17C. The second thin portion constituting portion 16C is formed in a curved surface shape corresponding to the first thin portion constituting portion 9C.
A curved plate-like portion having a constant thickness sandwiched between the first thin portion constituting portion 9C and the second thin portion constituting portion 16C constitutes the thin portion 21C. A portion sandwiched between regions where the first and second concave portions 7C and 14C are not provided in the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 constitutes a thick portion 22C. When the area | region which opposes the 1st connection part structure part 10C and the 1st connection surface part 11C in the 2nd main surface 5 is made into the 2nd recessed part opposing part 5C, the 1st connection part structure part 10C and the 1st A region sandwiched between the connecting surface portion 11C, the second connecting portion constituting portion 17C, and the second recessed portion facing portion 5C constitutes a connecting portion 23C that connects the thin portion 21C and the thick portion 22C.
 このような構成では、Y方向及びX方向において、センサ40Cの寸法を第1の凹部7Cの寸法よりも小さくできる。ここで、センサ40Cは、センシングを行うセンサ本体46Cと、センサ本体46CのXY方向における外周を支持固定する筐体47Cとを有する。したがって、センサ40C全体の寸法を第1の凹部7Cの寸法よりも小さくし、センサ40Cを薄肉部21Cの第2の凹部14C側に配置することで、薄肉部21Cを補強できる。 In such a configuration, the dimension of the sensor 40C can be made smaller than the dimension of the first recess 7C in the Y direction and the X direction. Here, the sensor 40C includes a sensor main body 46C that performs sensing, and a housing 47C that supports and fixes the outer periphery of the sensor main body 46C in the XY direction. Therefore, the thin part 21C can be reinforced by making the overall dimension of the sensor 40C smaller than the dimension of the first concave part 7C and disposing the sensor 40C on the second concave part 14C side of the thin part 21C.
 また、図5(B)に示すように、図5(A)に示す構成を上下反転した構成としてもよい。この構成では、第1の凹部対向部分3D、第1の凹部7Dの第1の底面部8D、第1の薄肉部構成部分9D、第1の接続部構成部分10Dが、図5(A)の第2の凹部対向部分5C、第2の凹部14Cの第2の底面部15C、第2の薄肉部構成部分16C、第2の接続部構成部分17Cに対応し、第2の凹部14Dの第2の底面部15D、第2の薄肉部構成部分16D、第2の接続部構成部分17D、第2の接続面部18Dが、図5(A)の第1の凹部7Cの第1の底面部8C、第1の薄肉部構成部分9C、第1の接続部構成部分10C、第1の接続面部11Cに対応し、薄肉部21D、厚肉部22D、接続部23Dが設けられる。また第1の凹部7Dの外縁が第2の凹部14Dの外縁より内側に位置する。 Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the configuration shown in FIG. 5A may be vertically inverted. In this configuration, the first concave portion facing portion 3D, the first bottom surface portion 8D of the first concave portion 7D, the first thin portion constituting portion 9D, and the first connecting portion constituting portion 10D are as shown in FIG. The second concave portion 14D corresponds to the second concave portion facing portion 5C, the second bottom surface portion 15C of the second concave portion 14C, the second thin portion constituting portion 16C, and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17C. The bottom surface portion 15D, the second thin portion constituting portion 16D, the second connecting portion constituting portion 17D, and the second connecting surface portion 18D are the first bottom face portion 8C of the first recess 7C in FIG. Corresponding to the first thin portion constituting portion 9C, the first connecting portion constituting portion 10C, and the first connecting surface portion 11C, a thin portion 21D, a thick portion 22D, and a connecting portion 23D are provided. Further, the outer edge of the first recess 7D is located inside the outer edge of the second recess 14D.
 このような構成でも、センサ40D全体の寸法を第1の凹部7Dの寸法よりも大きくし、センサ40Dを薄肉部21Dの第2の凹部14D側に配置することで、薄肉部21Dを補強できる。ここで、センサ本体46Dの寸法は、適切にセンシングを行うために、第1の凹部7D全体の寸法よりも小さいことが好ましい。すなわち、第1の凹部7D全体の寸法は、センサ本体46Dの寸法よりも大きく、且つセンサ40D全体の寸法より小さいことが好ましい。
 また、第1の凹部の外縁の少なくとも一部が第2の凹部の外縁より内側又は外側に位置するようにしてもよい。
Even in such a configuration, the thin portion 21D can be reinforced by making the overall size of the sensor 40D larger than the size of the first concave portion 7D and disposing the sensor 40D on the second concave portion 14D side of the thin portion 21D. Here, the size of the sensor body 46D is preferably smaller than the overall size of the first recess 7D in order to appropriately perform sensing. That is, the overall dimension of the first recess 7D is preferably larger than the dimension of the sensor body 46D and smaller than the overall dimension of the sensor 40D.
Moreover, you may make it at least one part of the outer edge of a 1st recessed part locate inside or the outer side from the outer edge of a 2nd recessed part.
 また、図6(A)に示すように、第2の凹部14Eを、平面状の第2の底面部15Eと、第2の接続面部18Eとで構成し、第1の底面部8と第2の底面部15Eとで挟まれる薄肉部21Eを形成してもよい。この場合、第1の接続面部11と第2の接続面部18Eとで挟まれる接続部23Eと、薄肉部21E及び接続部23E以外の部分で構成される厚肉部22Eとが設けられる。
 また、図6(B)に示すように、第2の凹部14Fを、第2の主面5側に曲面状に突出する第2の底面部15Fと、第2の接続面部18Fとで構成し、第1の底面部8と第2の底面部15Fとで挟まれる薄肉部21Fを形成してもよい。この場合、第1の接続面部11と第2の接続面部18Fとで挟まれる接続部23Fと、薄肉部21F及び接続部23F以外の部分で構成される厚肉部22Fとが設けられる。
 さらに、図6(C)に示すように、第1の凹部7Gを、第2の主面5側に曲面状に突出する第1の底面部8Gで構成し、第2の凹部14Gを第1の主面3側に突出する第2の底面部15Gで構成してもよい。
Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the second recess 14E is composed of a planar second bottom surface portion 15E and a second connection surface portion 18E, and the first bottom surface portion 8 and the second bottom surface portion 8E. You may form the thin part 21E pinched | interposed with the bottom face part 15E. In this case, a connection portion 23E sandwiched between the first connection surface portion 11 and the second connection surface portion 18E, and a thick portion 22E composed of portions other than the thin portion 21E and the connection portion 23E are provided.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the second concave portion 14F is constituted by a second bottom surface portion 15F that protrudes in a curved shape toward the second main surface 5 side, and a second connection surface portion 18F. The thin wall portion 21F sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8 and the second bottom surface portion 15F may be formed. In this case, a connection portion 23F sandwiched between the first connection surface portion 11 and the second connection surface portion 18F, and a thick portion 22F configured by portions other than the thin portion 21F and the connection portion 23F are provided.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6C, the first concave portion 7G is constituted by a first bottom surface portion 8G protruding in a curved shape on the second main surface 5 side, and the second concave portion 14G is formed as the first concave portion 14G. You may comprise by the 2nd bottom face part 15G which protrudes in the main surface 3 side.
 以下、カバー部材の好ましい形態について、図1,2に示す構成を例示して説明するが、図4~6の構成にも同様に適用できる。
 薄肉部21のヘイズ値(曇り度)は、16%以下が好ましく、15%以下がさらに好ましく、10%以下がさらに好ましい。薄肉部21のヘイズ値を16%以下とすることで、薄肉部21を構成する第1,第2の底面部8,15の表面平坦性とカバー部材1の美観性を両立できる。すなわち、薄肉部21のヘイズ値が16%以下であり第1,第2の底面部8,15の表面平坦性が高いので、上述したように第2の凹部14にセンサ40が配置された場合であっても、所望のセンシング能力を実現できる。ただし、薄肉部21に表示パネルを配置する場合には、後述の防眩処理を行うことがある。このときのヘイズ値は、上記範囲に限らない。
Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of the cover member will be described by exemplifying the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, but the same applies to the configurations of FIGS.
The haze value (cloudiness) of the thin-walled portion 21 is preferably 16% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and further preferably 10% or less. By setting the haze value of the thin portion 21 to 16% or less, both the surface flatness of the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 constituting the thin portion 21 and the aesthetic appearance of the cover member 1 can be achieved. That is, when the haze value of the thin portion 21 is 16% or less and the surface flatness of the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 is high, the sensor 40 is disposed in the second recess 14 as described above. Even so, the desired sensing capability can be realized. However, when a display panel is arranged in the thin portion 21, an anti-glare process described later may be performed. The haze value at this time is not limited to the above range.
 また、薄肉部21の表面平坦性は、薄肉部21の第2の底面部15に印刷した場合に印刷層の表面平坦性に影響を及ぼす。薄肉部21のヘイズ値を16%以下とすることで、センサ感度に影響の出ない表面平坦性を確保でき、後述する印刷層の美観を優れたものにできる。一方、薄肉部21のヘイズ値が16%より大きい場合には、薄肉部21の最表面にできた凹凸に、印刷に用いたインクが入りきらず、カバー部材1を保護対象に実装した後に外観が悪くなる。 Further, the surface flatness of the thin portion 21 affects the surface flatness of the printed layer when printing is performed on the second bottom surface portion 15 of the thin portion 21. By setting the haze value of the thin-walled portion 21 to 16% or less, surface flatness that does not affect the sensor sensitivity can be secured, and the aesthetics of the printed layer described later can be made excellent. On the other hand, when the haze value of the thin portion 21 is larger than 16%, the ink used for printing does not completely enter the unevenness formed on the outermost surface of the thin portion 21, and the appearance after the cover member 1 is mounted on the protection target. Deteriorate.
 また、薄肉部21のヘイズ値を16%以下とし、薄肉部21の透過率を高めることで、薄肉部21と厚肉部22との間に統一感があり、全体として美観性に優れたカバー部材が実現できる。 In addition, the haze value of the thin portion 21 is set to 16% or less, and the transmittance of the thin portion 21 is increased so that there is a sense of unity between the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22, and the cover has excellent aesthetics as a whole. A member can be realized.
 なお、厚肉部22のヘイズ値は5%以下が好ましく、1%以下がより好ましく、0.5%以下がさらに好ましく、0.2%以下が特に好ましい。このように、エッチング処理等により形成される薄肉部21に比べ、厚肉部22は高い表面平坦性及び透過率を有している。したがって、仮に薄肉部21のヘイズ値が16%より大きい場合、高い透過率を有する厚肉部22に対し、薄肉部21が曇ってしまい、カバー部材1全体としての意匠性が悪化してしまう。ただし、厚肉部22に表示パネルを配置する場合には、後述の防眩処理を行うことがある。このときのヘイズ値は、上記範囲に限らない。
 なお、薄肉部21のヘイズ値は、第1,第2の凹部7,14を設ける際のエッチング条件等により調整できる。ヘイズ値は、日本工業規格 JIS K7136に基づいて測定できる。
In addition, the haze value of the thick portion 22 is preferably 5% or less, more preferably 1% or less, further preferably 0.5% or less, and particularly preferably 0.2% or less. Thus, compared with the thin part 21 formed by an etching process etc., the thick part 22 has high surface flatness and transmittance | permeability. Therefore, if the haze value of the thin wall portion 21 is larger than 16%, the thin wall portion 21 becomes cloudy with respect to the thick wall portion 22 having high transmittance, and the design of the cover member 1 as a whole is deteriorated. However, when a display panel is arranged in the thick portion 22, an anti-glare process described later may be performed. The haze value at this time is not limited to the above range.
In addition, the haze value of the thin part 21 can be adjusted by the etching conditions at the time of providing the 1st, 2nd recessed parts 7 and 14. The haze value can be measured based on Japanese Industrial Standard JIS K7136.
 カバー部材1は化学強化ガラスであることが好ましい。化学強化されたカバー部材1は、薄肉部21及び厚肉部22の表面、すなわち第1,第2の主面3,5全体に圧縮応力層が形成されているため、高い機械的強度を得られる。 The cover member 1 is preferably a chemically strengthened glass. The chemically strengthened cover member 1 has high mechanical strength because the compressive stress layer is formed on the surfaces of the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22, that is, the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5. It is done.
 ここで、化学強化されたガラスの内部引張応力(CT:Central Tension)は一般に、板厚tと、圧縮応力層の表面圧縮応力CS(Compressive Stress)と、圧縮応力層の深さDOL(Depth Of Layer)と、によって、関係式CT=(CS×DOL)/(t-2×DOL)により近似的に求められる。したがって、同じCSで、且つ同じDOLの場合、板厚が小さいほどCTが大きくなる。薄肉部21と厚肉部22を有するカバー部材1のように部分的に板厚の異なる部分があるガラスに対し、一般的なアルカリ金属溶融塩に浸漬する化学強化を行うと、第1の主面3及び第2の主面5から等方的にイオン交換され、部分的な板厚差に関わらず同じCS、同じDOLとなる。このとき、通常の平坦なカバー部材に行われるような条件で化学強化を行うと、薄肉部21のCTが過剰に大きくなり自爆破壊のおそれが高くなる。一方、薄肉部21が破壊しない程度のCS、DOLに合せた条件で全体を化学強化すると、強化としては弱い化学強化とならざるを得ず、厚肉部22の強度が、薄肉部21を持たない平坦なカバー部材に較べて弱くなる。したがって、厚肉部22には通常の平坦なカバー部材と同等のCS、DOLを与えつつ、薄肉部21には、薄肉部21が破壊しない程度のCS、DOLを与えることが好ましい。すなわち、厚肉部22に形成された圧縮応力層の深さよりも、薄肉部21に形成された圧縮応力層の深さの方が小さいことが好ましい。 Here, the internal tensile stress (CT) of the chemically strengthened glass is generally the plate thickness t, the surface compressive stress CS (Compressive Stress) of the compressive stress layer, and the depth DOL (Depth Of) of the compressive stress layer. (Layer) and the relational expression CT = (CS × DOL) / (t−2 × DOL). Therefore, in the same CS and the same DOL, the smaller the plate thickness, the larger the CT. When chemical strengthening is performed by immersing in a general alkali metal molten salt on a glass having a portion having a partially different plate thickness, such as the cover member 1 having the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22, the first main component is obtained. Ions are exchanged isotropically from the surface 3 and the second main surface 5, and the same CS and the same DOL are obtained regardless of partial plate thickness differences. At this time, if chemical strengthening is performed under the conditions that are applied to a normal flat cover member, the CT of the thin portion 21 becomes excessively large and the risk of self-destruct destruction increases. On the other hand, if the whole is chemically strengthened under conditions matching CS and DOL so that the thin-walled portion 21 does not break, the strengthening has to be weak chemical strengthening, and the strength of the thick-walled portion 22 has the thin-walled portion 21. It is weaker than a flat cover member. Therefore, it is preferable to give CS and DOL to the thin portion 21 so that the thin portion 21 is not destroyed while giving the thick portion 22 CS and DOL equivalent to those of a normal flat cover member. That is, it is preferable that the depth of the compressive stress layer formed in the thin portion 21 is smaller than the depth of the compressive stress layer formed in the thick portion 22.
 より具体的には、厚肉部22のCSは、好ましくは400MPa以上、さらに好ましくは500MPa以上、さらに好ましくは600MPa以上とし、DOLは、好ましくは15μm以上、さらに好ましくは20μm以上、さらに好ましくは25μm以上とする。厚肉部22のCSは、好ましくは1300MPa以下、さらに好ましくは1200MPa以下、さらに好ましくは1100MPa以下とし、DOLは、好ましくは100μm以下、さらに好ましくは80μm以下、さらに好ましくは70μm以下とする。また、薄肉部21のCSは、好ましくは300MPa以上、さらに好ましくは400MPa以上、さらに好ましくは500MPa以上とし、DOLは、好ましくは5μm以上、さらに好ましくは7μm以上、さらに好ましくは10μm以上とする。また、薄肉部21のCSは、好ましくは1300MPa以下、さらに好ましくは1200MPa以下、さらに好ましくは1100MPa以下とし、DOLは、好ましくは25μm以下、さらに好ましくは20μm以下、さらに好ましくは15μm以下とする。これによって、厚肉部22には、凹部を持たない通常の平坦なカバー部材と同等の強度をもたせつつ、薄肉部21には、可能な範囲で必要な強化を与えられる。本実施形態の場合、薄肉部21は第1の主面3及び第2の主面5から凹入した位置にあるため、カバー部材1を使用した機器を落下させたような場合でも、薄肉部21が直接床面(地面)に接触する確率が低く、薄肉部21が厚肉部22よりも低いCS、DOLであっても破損しにくい。このように薄肉部21と厚肉部22のCS、DOLを異ならせる方法については後述する。 More specifically, the CS of the thick portion 22 is preferably 400 MPa or more, more preferably 500 MPa or more, further preferably 600 MPa or more, and the DOL is preferably 15 μm or more, more preferably 20 μm or more, and further preferably 25 μm. That's it. The CS of the thick portion 22 is preferably 1300 MPa or less, more preferably 1200 MPa or less, more preferably 1100 MPa or less, and the DOL is preferably 100 μm or less, more preferably 80 μm or less, and even more preferably 70 μm or less. The CS of the thin-walled portion 21 is preferably 300 MPa or more, more preferably 400 MPa or more, more preferably 500 MPa or more, and DOL is preferably 5 μm or more, more preferably 7 μm or more, and further preferably 10 μm or more. The CS of the thin wall portion 21 is preferably 1300 MPa or less, more preferably 1200 MPa or less, further preferably 1100 MPa or less, and the DOL is preferably 25 μm or less, more preferably 20 μm or less, and further preferably 15 μm or less. As a result, the thick portion 22 has the same strength as a normal flat cover member having no recess, and the thin portion 21 is given the necessary reinforcement as far as possible. In the case of the present embodiment, since the thin portion 21 is in a position recessed from the first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5, even if the device using the cover member 1 is dropped, the thin portion The probability that 21 is in direct contact with the floor (ground) is low, and even if the thin-walled portion 21 is CS or DOL lower than the thick-walled portion 22, it is difficult to break. A method for differentiating CS and DOL between the thin portion 21 and the thick portion 22 will be described later.
 カバー部材1は、平滑性を高めるため、第1の主面3及び第2の主面5が研磨加工されることが好ましい。例えば、スエードパッドを用いて、酸化セリウム又はコロイダルシリカ含む研磨スラリーを研磨剤として行うと、カバー部材1の第1,第2の主面3,5に存在する傷(クラック)やカバー部材1の撓みや凹みを除去でき、カバー部材1の強度が向上する。研磨は、カバー部材1の化学強化前後どちらで行っても良いが、化学強化後に行うことが好ましい。なぜならば、イオン交換による化学強化を施したガラス板は、その第1の主面及び第2の主面に欠陥が発生する。また、最大で1μm程度の微細な凹凸が残留することがある。ガラス板に力が作用する場合、前述の欠陥や微細な凹凸が存在する箇所に応力が集中し、理論強度よりも小さな力でも割れることがある。そのため、化学強化後のガラス板の最表面に存在する、欠陥及び微細な凹凸を有する層(欠陥層)を研磨により除去する。なお、欠陥が存在する欠陥層の厚さは、化学強化の条件にもよるが、通常、0.01~0.5μmである。 The cover member 1 is preferably polished on the first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5 in order to improve smoothness. For example, when a polishing slurry containing cerium oxide or colloidal silica is used as a polishing agent using a suede pad, scratches (cracks) present on the first and second main surfaces 3 and 5 of the cover member 1 and the cover member 1 The bending and the dent can be removed, and the strength of the cover member 1 is improved. Polishing may be performed either before or after chemical strengthening of the cover member 1, but is preferably performed after chemical strengthening. This is because defects are generated on the first main surface and the second main surface of the glass plate subjected to chemical strengthening by ion exchange. In addition, fine irregularities of up to about 1 μm may remain. When a force acts on the glass plate, the stress concentrates on a location where the above-described defects or fine irregularities exist, and may break even with a force smaller than the theoretical strength. Therefore, the layer (defect layer) which has a defect and fine unevenness | corrugation which exists in the outermost surface of the glass plate after chemical strengthening is removed by grinding | polishing. The thickness of the defect layer in which defects are present is usually 0.01 to 0.5 μm although it depends on the conditions of chemical strengthening.
 なお、研磨は厚肉部22のみ実施してもよい。この場合、第2の主面5側にセンサや表示パネルを配置した場合のセンシング感度の向上、視認性の向上などの効果が得られる。また厚肉部22がカバー部材1全体の強度に関わるため、欠陥を研磨加工により除くことでカバー部材1の強度を向上できる。化学強化後のカバー部材1の厚肉部22を研磨する場合、第1,第2の凹部7,14の圧縮応力層の深さ(DOL)が厚肉部22に比べ深くなる。すなわち薄肉部21の強度を維持したカバー部材1が得られる。 Note that polishing may be performed only on the thick portion 22. In this case, effects such as an improvement in sensing sensitivity and an improvement in visibility when a sensor or a display panel is disposed on the second main surface 5 side can be obtained. Moreover, since the thick part 22 is concerned with the intensity | strength of the cover member 1 whole, the intensity | strength of the cover member 1 can be improved by removing a defect by grinding | polishing. When polishing the thick portion 22 of the cover member 1 after chemical strengthening, the depth (DOL) of the compressive stress layer of the first and second recesses 7 and 14 becomes deeper than the thick portion 22. That is, the cover member 1 that maintains the strength of the thin portion 21 is obtained.
 また、研磨を第1,第2の凹部7,14に実施してもよい。この場合、第1,第2の凹部7,14にセンサや表示パネルを配置した場合のセンシング感度の向上、視認性の向上などの効果が得られる。化学強化後のカバー部材1の第1,第2の凹部7,14を研磨する場合、厚肉部22の圧縮応力層の深さ(DOL)が薄肉部21に比べ深くなる。第1,第2の凹部7,14形成時にできた異質層を研磨により除去することで、後述する防汚層を形成しやすくなる。 Further, polishing may be performed on the first and second concave portions 7 and 14. In this case, effects such as improved sensing sensitivity and improved visibility when sensors and display panels are arranged in the first and second recesses 7 and 14 can be obtained. When the first and second recesses 7 and 14 of the cover member 1 after chemical strengthening are polished, the depth (DOL) of the compressive stress layer of the thick portion 22 becomes deeper than that of the thin portion 21. By removing the extraneous layer formed during the formation of the first and second recesses 7 and 14 by polishing, it becomes easy to form an antifouling layer to be described later.
 また、上述したように、本実施形態のカバー部材1は携帯情報端末の保護用途に限定されないが、特に携帯情報端末、表示パネルなどの表示装置の保護のために用いられる場合、厚肉部22のZ方向厚みは、5mm以下が好ましく、2mm以下がより好ましく、1.5mm以下さらに好ましく、0.8mm以下が特に好ましい。なぜなら、5mmよりも厚い場合、薄肉部21との厚みの差が大きくなり、加工が困難になるほか、例えば携帯情報端末の使用には質量増になるからである。また、厚肉部22のZ方向厚みは、その剛性を高めるため、0.1mm以上であり、0.15mm以上が好ましく、0.2mm以上がより好ましい。0.1mmより薄い場合、剛性が低くなり過ぎ、携帯情報端末の保護の用をなさない恐れがある。 Further, as described above, the cover member 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the use for protecting a portable information terminal, but particularly when used for protecting a display device such as a portable information terminal or a display panel, the thick portion 22. The thickness in the Z direction is preferably 5 mm or less, more preferably 2 mm or less, further preferably 1.5 mm or less, and particularly preferably 0.8 mm or less. This is because if it is thicker than 5 mm, the difference in thickness from the thin portion 21 becomes large, making it difficult to process, and increasing the mass when using a portable information terminal, for example. The thickness of the thick portion 22 in the Z direction is 0.1 mm or more, preferably 0.15 mm or more, and more preferably 0.2 mm or more in order to increase the rigidity. If it is thinner than 0.1 mm, the rigidity becomes too low and there is a risk that the portable information terminal will not be used for protection.
 また、薄肉部21のZ方向最大厚みは、1mm以下であり、0.4mm以下が好ましく、0.35mm以下がより好ましく、0.3mm以下がさらに好ましく、0.25mm以下が特に好ましく、0.2mm以下がとりわけ好ましく、0.1mm以下が最も好ましい。特に、薄肉部21の第2の凹部14側に静電容量式センサが配置された場合、薄肉部21が薄いほど、検出される静電容量が大きくなり、センシング感度が向上する。例えば、指先の指紋の微細な凹凸を検出する指紋認証の場合にも、指先の指紋の微細な凹凸に応じた静電容量の差が大きくなるため、高いセンシング感度で検出できる。一方、薄肉部21のZ方向厚みの下限は、特に限定されないが、薄肉部21が過度に薄くなると、強度が低下し、センサ等の保護部としての適切な機能を発揮し難くなる傾向がある。したがって、薄肉部21のZ方向厚みは、例えば0.01mm以上であり、0.05mm以上が好ましい。 Further, the maximum thickness in the Z direction of the thin portion 21 is 1 mm or less, preferably 0.4 mm or less, more preferably 0.35 mm or less, further preferably 0.3 mm or less, particularly preferably 0.25 mm or less. 2 mm or less is particularly preferable, and 0.1 mm or less is most preferable. In particular, when the capacitance type sensor is arranged on the second concave portion 14 side of the thin portion 21, the thinner the thin portion 21, the larger the detected capacitance and the better the sensing sensitivity. For example, in the case of fingerprint authentication that detects fine irregularities of a fingertip fingerprint, a difference in capacitance according to the fine irregularities of the fingertip fingerprint becomes large, so that detection can be performed with high sensing sensitivity. On the other hand, the lower limit of the thickness in the Z direction of the thin portion 21 is not particularly limited. However, when the thin portion 21 becomes excessively thin, the strength tends to decrease and it is difficult to exhibit an appropriate function as a protective portion such as a sensor. . Therefore, the thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction is, for example, 0.01 mm or more, and preferably 0.05 mm or more.
 薄肉部21のZ方向厚みに対して、厚肉部22のZ方向厚みは10倍以下が好ましく、より好ましくは8倍以下である。薄肉部21のZ方向厚みに対して、厚肉部22のZ方向厚みが10倍超であると、加工に困難が生じる恐れがある。薄肉部21のZ方向厚みに対する、厚肉部22のZ方向厚みの比率は特に下限値はなく、用途に応じて設定できる。携帯情報端末の保護用途では、典型的に1.5倍以上である。厚肉部22に対する薄肉部21の面積の比率は、1/2以下であり、1/3以下が好ましく、1/4以下がより好ましい。厚肉部22に対する薄肉部21の面積の比率が1/2より大きいと強度が著しく損なわれる恐れがある。なお、薄肉部21のZ方向厚みは、例えば株式会社キーエンス製のレーザー変位計LT-9000で測定できる。 The Z direction thickness of the thick portion 22 is preferably 10 times or less, more preferably 8 times or less, relative to the Z direction thickness of the thin portion 21. If the thickness in the Z direction of the thick portion 22 is more than 10 times the thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction, it may be difficult to process. The ratio of the thickness in the Z direction of the thick portion 22 to the thickness in the Z direction of the thin portion 21 is not particularly limited and can be set according to the application. In the protection use of a portable information terminal, it is typically 1.5 times or more. The ratio of the area of the thin portion 21 to the thick portion 22 is 1/2 or less, preferably 1/3 or less, and more preferably 1/4 or less. If the ratio of the area of the thin portion 21 to the thick portion 22 is greater than ½, the strength may be significantly impaired. The thickness of the thin portion 21 in the Z direction can be measured by, for example, a laser displacement meter LT-9000 manufactured by Keyence Corporation.
 薄肉部21のヤング率は60GPa以上であり、65GPa以上が好ましく、70GPa以上がより好ましい。薄肉部21のヤング率が60GPa以上であると、外部からの衝突物との衝突に起因する薄肉部21の破損を十分に防止できる。また、指紋認証用センサが第2の凹部14に配置される場合には、スマートフォン等の落下や衝突に起因する薄肉部21の破損を十分に防止できる。さらに、薄肉部21により保護されるセンサの破損等を、十分に防止できる。また、薄肉部21のヤング率の上限は特に限定されないが、生産性の観点から、薄肉部21のヤング率は、例えば200GPa以下であり、150GPa以下が好ましい。 The Young's modulus of the thin portion 21 is 60 GPa or more, preferably 65 GPa or more, and more preferably 70 GPa or more. When the Young's modulus of the thin-walled portion 21 is 60 GPa or more, the thin-walled portion 21 can be sufficiently prevented from being damaged due to a collision with an external collision object. Moreover, when the sensor for fingerprint authentication is arrange | positioned in the 2nd recessed part 14, damage to the thin part 21 resulting from fall or collision of a smart phone etc. can fully be prevented. Furthermore, damage to the sensor protected by the thin portion 21 can be sufficiently prevented. Moreover, although the upper limit of the Young's modulus of the thin part 21 is not specifically limited, From a viewpoint of productivity, the Young's modulus of the thin part 21 is 200 GPa or less, for example, and 150 GPa or less is preferable.
 薄肉部21のビッカース硬度Hvは、400以上が好ましく、500以上がより好ましい。薄肉部21のビッカース硬度が400以上であると、外部からの衝突物との衝突に起因する薄肉部21の擦傷を十分に防止できる。また、指紋認証用センサが第2の凹部14に配置される場合には、スマートフォン等の落下や衝突に起因する薄肉部21の擦傷を十分に防止できる。さらに、薄肉部21により保護されるセンサの破損等を、十分に防止できる。また、薄肉部21のビッカース硬度の上限は、特に限定されないが、過度に高すぎると研磨や加工が困難となる場合がある。したがって、化学強化ガラスのビッカース硬度は、例えば1200以下であり、好ましくは1000以下である。なお、ビッカース硬度は、例えば日本工業規格JIS Z 2244に記載された、ビッカース硬さ試験により測定できる。 The Vickers hardness Hv of the thin portion 21 is preferably 400 or more, and more preferably 500 or more. When the Vickers hardness of the thin portion 21 is 400 or more, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the thin portion 21 from being scratched due to a collision with a collision object from the outside. Further, when the fingerprint authentication sensor is disposed in the second recess 14, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the thin-walled portion 21 from being scratched due to dropping or collision of a smartphone or the like. Furthermore, damage to the sensor protected by the thin portion 21 can be sufficiently prevented. Moreover, the upper limit of the Vickers hardness of the thin-walled portion 21 is not particularly limited, but if it is too high, polishing and processing may be difficult. Therefore, the Vickers hardness of the chemically strengthened glass is, for example, 1200 or less, and preferably 1000 or less. The Vickers hardness can be measured by, for example, a Vickers hardness test described in Japanese Industrial Standard JIS Z 2244.
 薄肉部21の周波数1MHzでの比誘電率は、7以上が好ましく、7.2以上より好ましく、7.5以上がさらに好ましい。静電容量方式センサが薄肉部21を構成する第2の凹部14に配置される場合、薄肉部21の比誘電率を高くすることにより、検出される静電容量を大きくでき、優れたセンシング感度を実現できる。特に、薄肉部21の周波数1MHzでの比誘電率が7以上であると、指先の指紋の微細な凹凸を検出する指紋認証の場合にも、指先の指紋の微細な凹凸に応じた静電容量の差が大きくなるため、高いセンシング感度での検出できる。また、薄肉部21の比誘電率の上限については、特に限定されないが、過度に高すぎると誘電損失が大きくなり、消費電力が増加し、また、反応が遅くなる場合がある。したがって、薄肉部21の周波数1MHzでの比誘電率は、例えば20以下が好ましく、15以下がより好ましい。比誘電率は、カバー部材1の両面に電極を作製したキャパシタンスの静電容量測定によって得られる。 The relative permittivity of the thin portion 21 at a frequency of 1 MHz is preferably 7 or more, more preferably 7.2 or more, and further preferably 7.5 or more. When the capacitance type sensor is arranged in the second recess 14 constituting the thin portion 21, the detected capacitance can be increased by increasing the relative dielectric constant of the thin portion 21, and excellent sensing sensitivity. Can be realized. In particular, when the relative permittivity of the thin-walled portion 21 at a frequency of 1 MHz is 7 or more, the capacitance corresponding to the fine irregularities of the fingerprint of the fingertip is also obtained in the case of fingerprint authentication for detecting the fine irregularities of the fingerprint of the fingertip. Because the difference between the two becomes large, detection with high sensing sensitivity is possible. Further, the upper limit of the relative dielectric constant of the thin portion 21 is not particularly limited, but if it is excessively high, the dielectric loss increases, the power consumption increases, and the reaction may become slow. Accordingly, the relative dielectric constant of the thin portion 21 at a frequency of 1 MHz is preferably 20 or less, and more preferably 15 or less. The relative dielectric constant is obtained by measuring the capacitance of a capacitance in which electrodes are formed on both surfaces of the cover member 1.
 カバー部材1の第2の主面5には、印刷層が設けられることが好ましい。特に、第2の凹部14にも印刷層を設けることが好ましい。このような印刷層を設けることにより、カバー部材1の保護対象である携帯情報端末の内部や、第2の凹部14に配置された指紋認証センサが、カバー部材1を介して視認されることを効果的に防止できる。また、所望の色を付与でき、優れた外観性を得られる。カバー部材1(薄肉部21)の静電容量を高く維持するためには、印刷層の厚みは薄ければ薄い程良い。印刷層の厚みは、30μm以下が好ましく、25μm以下がより好ましく、10μm以下がさらに好ましい。但し、比誘電率が高い化合物を含むインク(例えばTiOを含むインク)を使用した白印刷では、印刷層の比誘電率が高いので、印刷層の厚みは100μm以下が好ましく、50μm以下がより好ましく、25μm以下が特に好ましい。 A print layer is preferably provided on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1. In particular, it is preferable to provide a printing layer also in the second recess 14. By providing such a printed layer, the fingerprint authentication sensor disposed in the portable information terminal that is the protection target of the cover member 1 or in the second recess 14 is visually recognized through the cover member 1. It can be effectively prevented. Moreover, a desired color can be imparted and an excellent appearance can be obtained. In order to keep the capacitance of the cover member 1 (thin wall portion 21) high, the thinner the printed layer, the better. The thickness of the printing layer is preferably 30 μm or less, more preferably 25 μm or less, and even more preferably 10 μm or less. However, in white printing using an ink containing a compound having a high relative dielectric constant (for example, an ink containing TiO 2 ), since the relative dielectric constant of the printed layer is high, the thickness of the printed layer is preferably 100 μm or less, more preferably 50 μm or less. 25 μm or less is particularly preferable.
 カバー部材1の第2の主面5に印刷層が設けられる場合には、センサ等の装置は、印刷層の裏面において第2の凹部14とZ方向に対向する位置(薄肉部21の裏側)に配置される。したがって、印刷層の最表面の算術平均粗さRaは、50nm以下が好ましく、45nm以下がより好ましく、30nm以下がさらに好ましい。さらに好適には、印刷層の裏面の算術平均粗さRaも、50nm以下が好ましく、45nm以下がより好ましく、30nm以下がさらに好ましい。印刷層の最表面及び裏面の算術平均粗さRaが50nm以下であると、指の指紋の凹凸の程度と比べて十分に小さくなるため、センシング感度が高くなる点で好ましい。また、印刷層の最表面及び裏面の算術平均粗さRaの下限は、特に限定されないが、好ましくは2nm以上であり、より好ましくは4nm以上である。 When the printing layer is provided on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1, a device such as a sensor is positioned on the back surface of the printing layer so as to face the second recess 14 in the Z direction (the back side of the thin portion 21). Placed in. Therefore, the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the outermost surface of the printing layer is preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less. More preferably, the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the back surface of the printing layer is also preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less. When the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the outermost surface and the back surface of the printed layer is 50 nm or less, it is preferable in terms of increasing sensing sensitivity because it is sufficiently smaller than the degree of unevenness of the fingerprint of the finger. Further, the lower limit of the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the outermost surface and the back surface of the printing layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2 nm or more, more preferably 4 nm or more.
 (カバー部材の製造方法)
 上述したカバー部材1は、図7(A)に示すように、カバー部材1と同一寸法のガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105に、それぞれ対向する少なくとも一つの第1の凹部107及び第2の凹部114を設けることによって、得られる。
(Manufacturing method of cover member)
As shown in FIG. 7A, the cover member 1 described above has at least one first surface facing the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 having the same dimensions as the cover member 1. This is obtained by providing one recess 107 and second recess 114.
 ガラス基板101の製造方法について説明する。先ず、各成分の原料を後述する組成となるように調合し、ガラス溶融窯で加熱溶融する。バブリング、撹拌、清澄剤の添加等によりガラスを均質化し、公知の成形法により所定の厚さのガラス板に成形し、徐冷する。ガラスの成形法としては、例えば、フロート法、プレス法、フュージョン法、ダウンドロー法及びロールアウト法が挙げられる。特に、大量生産に適したフロート法が好適である。また、フロート法以外の連続成形法、すなわち、フュージョン法およびダウンドロー法も好適である。任意の成形法により平板状に成形されたガラス部材は、徐冷された後、所望のサイズ(カバー部材1のサイズ)に切断される。なお、より正確な寸法精度が必要な場合等には、切断後のガラス部材に研磨加工を施してもよい。これにより、図7(A)に示すような、平面状の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105を有し、全体として平板状であるガラス基板101が得られる。 A method for manufacturing the glass substrate 101 will be described. First, the raw materials of each component are prepared so as to have the composition described later, and heated and melted in a glass melting furnace. The glass is homogenized by bubbling, stirring, adding a clarifying agent, etc., formed into a glass plate having a predetermined thickness by a known forming method, and slowly cooled. Examples of the glass forming method include a float method, a press method, a fusion method, a downdraw method, and a rollout method. In particular, a float method suitable for mass production is suitable. Further, continuous molding methods other than the float method, that is, the fusion method and the downdraw method are also suitable. The glass member formed into a flat plate shape by an arbitrary forming method is gradually cooled and then cut into a desired size (the size of the cover member 1). In addition, when more accurate dimensional accuracy is required, the glass member after cutting may be polished. As a result, a glass substrate 101 having a flat first main surface 103 and a second main surface 105 as shown in FIG. 7A and having a flat plate shape as a whole is obtained.
 続いて、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105に、それぞれ対向する少なくとも一つの第1の凹部107及び第2の凹部114を設ける凹部形成工程に移行する。凹部形成工程では、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103に図7(B)に示すような第1のマスク部材201を配置し、且つ、第2の主面105に第2のマスク部材301を配置した上で、ガラス基板101にエッチング処理が施される。 Subsequently, the process proceeds to a recess forming step in which at least one first recess 107 and second recess 114 facing the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 are provided. In the recess forming step, the first mask member 201 as shown in FIG. 7B is disposed on the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101, and the second mask member 301 is disposed on the second main surface 105. Then, the glass substrate 101 is etched.
 第1のマスク部材201のX方向寸法及びY方向寸法は、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103全体を覆えるように設定されている。図7(B)の例では、第1のマスク部材201のX方向寸法及びY方向寸法は、ガラス基板101のX方向寸法及びY方向寸法とほぼ等しい。さらに、第1のマスク部材201には、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103に、第1の凹部107を形成するための第1の凹部形成用孔207が設けられている。したがって、エッチャントが第1の凹部形成用孔207を介してガラス基板101の第1の主面103に到達し、図7(A)に示すように、第1の凹部107を形成する。なお、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103に複数の第1の凹部107を形成する場合には、複数の第1の凹部形成用孔207を有する第1のマスク部材201を用いればよい。 The X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the first mask member 201 are set so as to cover the entire first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101. In the example of FIG. 7B, the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the first mask member 201 are substantially equal to the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the glass substrate 101. Further, the first mask member 201 is provided with a first recess forming hole 207 for forming the first recess 107 in the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101. Therefore, the etchant reaches the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101 through the first recess forming hole 207, and the first recess 107 is formed as shown in FIG. In the case where the plurality of first recesses 107 are formed on the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101, the first mask member 201 having the plurality of first recess formation holes 207 may be used.
 第2のマスク部材301のX方向寸法及びY方向寸法は、ガラス基板101の第2の主面105全体を覆えるように設定されている。図7(B)の例では、第2のマスク部材301のX方向寸法及びY方向寸法は、ガラス基板101のX方向寸法及びY方向寸法とほぼ等しい。さらに、第2のマスク部材301には、ガラス基板101の第2の主面105に、第2の凹部形成用孔314が設けられている。したがって、エッチャントが第2の凹部形成用孔314を介してガラス基板101の第2の主面105に到達し、第2の凹部114を形成する。なお、ガラス基板101の第2の主面105に複数の第2の凹部114を形成する場合には、複数の第2の凹部形成用孔314を有する第2のマスク部材301を用いればよい。 The X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the second mask member 301 are set so as to cover the entire second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101. In the example of FIG. 7B, the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the second mask member 301 are substantially equal to the X direction dimension and the Y direction dimension of the glass substrate 101. Further, the second mask member 301 is provided with a second recess forming hole 314 in the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101. Therefore, the etchant reaches the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 through the second recess forming hole 314 and forms the second recess 114. In the case where a plurality of second recesses 114 are formed on the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101, the second mask member 301 having a plurality of second recess formation holes 314 may be used.
 このような処理により、図7(C)に示すように、ガラス基板101には、それぞれ少なくとも一つの第1の凹部107と、第2の凹部114とが設けられる。
 第1の凹部107は、平面状の第1の底面部108と、第1の凹部107の開口縁と第1の底面部108の外縁とを接続する第1の接続面部111とを備えている。第2の凹部114は、第1の底面部108に対応する位置に設けられた平面状の第2の底面部115と、第2の凹部114の開口縁と第2の底面部115の外縁とを接続する第2の接続面部118とを備えている。
 第1の底面部108と第2の底面部115とで挟まれる領域で平板状の薄肉部121が構成され、第1の接続面部111と第2の接続面部118とで挟まれる領域で接続部123が構成され、薄肉部121及び接続部123以外の部分で厚肉部122が構成される。
 また、第1の底面部108の第1の主面103からの深さ寸法D1は、第2の底面部115の第2の主面105からの深さ寸法D2よりも小さくなっている。このように深さ寸法D1と深さ寸法D2とを異ならせることにより、化学強化後に薄肉部121が平板状から曲板状になる。なお、第1の凹部107の幅寸法W1と第2の凹部114の幅寸法W2とを異ならせ、平面視において第1の凹部107が第2の凹部114と重なるようにしても、例えば図5(A),(B)に示すように、化学強化後に薄肉部121が平板状から曲板状になる。
By such processing, as shown in FIG. 7C, the glass substrate 101 is provided with at least one first recess 107 and second recess 114, respectively.
The first recess 107 includes a planar first bottom surface portion 108 and a first connection surface portion 111 that connects the opening edge of the first recess 107 and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion 108. . The second concave portion 114 includes a planar second bottom surface portion 115 provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion 108, an opening edge of the second concave portion 114, and an outer edge of the second bottom surface portion 115. And a second connection surface portion 118 for connecting the two.
A flat thin portion 121 is formed in a region sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 108 and the second bottom surface portion 115, and a connection portion is formed in a region sandwiched between the first connection surface portion 111 and the second connection surface portion 118. 123 is configured, and the thick portion 122 is configured by a portion other than the thin portion 121 and the connection portion 123.
Further, a depth dimension D1 of the first bottom surface portion 108 from the first main surface 103 is smaller than a depth dimension D2 of the second bottom surface portion 115 from the second main surface 105. Thus, by making the depth dimension D1 and the depth dimension D2 different, the thin-walled portion 121 changes from a flat plate shape to a curved plate shape after chemical strengthening. Note that the width dimension W1 of the first recess 107 and the width dimension W2 of the second recess 114 may be made different so that the first recess 107 overlaps the second recess 114 in plan view, for example, FIG. As shown in (A) and (B), the thin-walled portion 121 changes from a flat plate shape to a curved plate shape after chemical strengthening.
 ここで、ガラス基板101の薄肉部121を構成する第1,第2の底面部108,115の算術平均粗さRaは、上述したカバー部材1の第1,第2の底面部8,15と同様に、50nm以下が好ましく、45nm以下がより好ましく、30nm以下がさらに好ましい。薄肉部121のヘイズ値は、16%以下が好ましく、15%以下がさらに好ましく、10%以下がさらに好ましい。 Here, the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115 constituting the thin portion 121 of the glass substrate 101 is equal to the first and second bottom surface portions 8 and 15 of the cover member 1 described above. Similarly, 50 nm or less is preferable, 45 nm or less is more preferable, and 30 nm or less is more preferable. The haze value of the thin portion 121 is preferably 16% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and still more preferably 10% or less.
 ガラス基板101の第1の凹部107の第1の接続面部111は、カバー部材1の第1の凹部7の第1の接続面部11と同様、第1の底面部108と滑らかに接続する曲面状が好ましい。第1の接続面部111の曲率半径は、第1の凹部107の中央部から周縁部に向かうにしたがって大きくなることが好ましい。第1の接続面部111の曲率半径は、第1の底面部108の深さ寸法D1以上に設定されることが好ましい。第1の接続面部111の曲率半径は、0.1mm以上2mm以下が好ましい。第1の接続面部111と第1の主面103との接続部分は、カバー部材1の第1の接続面部11と第1の主面3との接続部分と同様(図3参照)、滑らかに連続する曲面状が好ましい。 The first connection surface portion 111 of the first recess 107 of the glass substrate 101 has a curved surface shape that smoothly connects with the first bottom surface portion 108, similarly to the first connection surface portion 11 of the first recess 7 of the cover member 1. Is preferred. It is preferable that the radius of curvature of the first connection surface portion 111 increases from the central portion of the first recess 107 toward the peripheral portion. The radius of curvature of the first connecting surface portion 111 is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the depth dimension D1 of the first bottom surface portion. The radius of curvature of the first connection surface portion 111 is preferably 0.1 mm or more and 2 mm or less. The connection portion between the first connection surface portion 111 and the first main surface 103 is the same as the connection portion between the first connection surface portion 11 and the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1 (see FIG. 3), and is smooth. A continuous curved surface is preferred.
 第1のマスク部材201及び第2のマスク部材301の材料は、例えば感光性有機材料、特に感光性樹脂材料であるレジストや樹脂、金属膜、セラミックスなど耐エッチャント性材料からなる。第1,第2の凹部形成用孔207,314は、レジストの場合には所定の露光、現像を行うことにより形成される。 The material of the first mask member 201 and the second mask member 301 is made of, for example, a photosensitive organic material, particularly an etchant-resistant material such as a photosensitive resin material such as a resist, a resin, a metal film, or ceramics. In the case of a resist, the first and second recess forming holes 207 and 314 are formed by performing predetermined exposure and development.
 エッチング処理は、ウェットエッチング及びドライエッチングのどちらでもよいが、コストの観点からウェットエッチングが好ましい。エッチャントとしては、ウェットエッチングの場合には、フッ酸を主成分とする溶液が挙げられ、ドライエッチングの場合には、フッ素系ガス等が挙げられる。エッチング処理を施すことにより、複数の凹部を有するガラス基板が簡便に得られる。 The etching process may be either wet etching or dry etching, but wet etching is preferable from the viewpoint of cost. Examples of the etchant include a solution containing hydrofluoric acid as a main component in the case of wet etching, and a fluorine-based gas in the case of dry etching. By performing the etching treatment, a glass substrate having a plurality of recesses can be easily obtained.
 また、エッチング処理は、ガラス基板101とエッチャントとを、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103又は第2の主面105に平行な方向(XY方向)に相対的に移動させながら行うことが好ましい。このようなエッチングは、ガラス基板101をXY方向に揺動させながら行ってもよく、エッチャントにXY方向の流れを生じさせることにより行ってもよく、両者を組み合わせて行ってもよい。基本的にエッチング処理はガラス基板101に対して等方的に進行する。そのため、第1,第2の凹部形成用孔207,314の開口辺直下では、エッチングされる深さと同等の半径で側面方向にもエッチングが進行し、ガラス基板101の第1,第2の凹部107,114の第1,第2の接続面部111,118を、第1,第2の底面部108,115と滑らかに接続する曲面状とできる。また、ガラス基板101とエッチャントとを、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103又は第2の主面105に平行な方向(XY方向)に相対的に移動させながらエッチングを行えば、エッチングの進行に伴って第1,第2の凹部形成用孔207,314の開口辺からガラス基板101の第1,第2の凹部107,114側に巻き込む流れが生じる。そして、第1,第2の凹部107,114の中央部よりも周辺部から側面への流速が早まる。そのため、相対的に第1,第2の凹部107,114の周縁から側面側にかけてのエッチングレートが高くなり、第1,第2の接続面部111,118の曲率半径を第1,第2の凹部107,114の中央部から周縁部に向かうにしたがって大きくできる。また、第1,第2の接続面部111,118の曲率半径を第1,第2の底面部108,115の深さ寸法以上とできる。また、エッチング処理時間およびガラス基板101とエッチャントとの相対移動速度を調整することにより、第1,第2の接続面部111,118の側面の曲率半径を0.1mm以上2mm以下に調整できる。さらに、上記のようにガラス基板101とエッチャントとを、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103又は第2の主面105に平行な方向(XY方向)に相対的に移動させながらエッチングを行うことにより、化学強化を行うことなく第1の底面部108を中心部に向かうにしたがって第1の主面103側もしくは第2の主面105側に突出する形状とできる。 The etching process is preferably performed while relatively moving the glass substrate 101 and the etchant in a direction (XY direction) parallel to the first main surface 103 or the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101. . Such etching may be performed while the glass substrate 101 is swung in the XY directions, may be performed by causing the etchant to flow in the XY directions, or may be performed in combination. Basically, the etching process isotropically proceeds with respect to the glass substrate 101. Therefore, the etching proceeds also in the side surface direction with a radius equal to the depth to be etched just below the opening sides of the first and second recess forming holes 207 and 314, and the first and second recesses of the glass substrate 101. The first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 of the 107 and 114 can be curved to smoothly connect to the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115. Further, if etching is performed while relatively moving the glass substrate 101 and the etchant in a direction parallel to the first main surface 103 or the second main surface 105 (XY direction) of the glass substrate 101, the progress of the etching is performed. Along with this, there is a flow of winding from the opening sides of the first and second recess forming holes 207 and 314 toward the first and second recesses 107 and 114 of the glass substrate 101. And the flow velocity from a peripheral part to a side surface becomes quicker than the center part of the 1st, 2nd recessed part 107,114. Therefore, the etching rate from the periphery of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 to the side surface side becomes relatively high, and the curvature radii of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 are set to be the first and second recesses. 107 and 114 can be enlarged from the center to the periphery. In addition, the radius of curvature of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 can be greater than or equal to the depth dimension of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115. Moreover, the curvature radius of the side surface of the 1st, 2nd connection surface parts 111 and 118 can be adjusted to 0.1 mm or more and 2 mm or less by adjusting etching processing time and the relative moving speed of the glass substrate 101 and an etchant. Furthermore, etching is performed while relatively moving the glass substrate 101 and the etchant in the direction (XY direction) parallel to the first main surface 103 or the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 as described above. Thus, the first bottom surface 108 can be projected to the first main surface 103 side or the second main surface 105 side toward the center without performing chemical strengthening.
 また、薄肉部121を構成する第1,第2の底面部108,115の算術平均粗さRaを50nm以下とするには、ガラス基板101上のエッチング液の流動性を上げるようにエッチング処理を行えばよい。また、薄肉部121のヘイズ値を16%以下とするためには、ガラス基板101上のエッチング液の流動性を上げるようにエッチング処理を行えばよい。また、化学強化を行うことなく第1の凹部107の底面を中心部に向かうにしたがって第1の主面103側もしくは第2の主面105側に突出する形状とするには、エッチング液が第1の凹部107の角部にぶつかるような流れをつくるようにエッチング処理を行えばよい。 Further, in order to reduce the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115 constituting the thin wall portion 121 to 50 nm or less, an etching process is performed so as to increase the fluidity of the etching solution on the glass substrate 101. Just do it. Further, in order to set the haze value of the thin portion 121 to 16% or less, an etching process may be performed so as to increase the fluidity of the etching solution on the glass substrate 101. In order to form the first main surface 103 side or the second main surface 105 side so that the bottom surface of the first concave portion 107 moves toward the center without performing chemical strengthening, an etching solution is used. The etching process may be performed so as to create a flow that hits the corners of one recess 107.
 なお、第1,第2の底面部108,115の深さ寸法D1,D2を異ならせるためには、エッチング処理時間の長さ、エッチング処理に使用する薬液の濃度やその流れ、エッチングの薬液温度を異ならせればよい。 In order to make the depth dimensions D1 and D2 of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115 different, the length of the etching process, the concentration and flow of the chemical used for the etching process, the chemical temperature of the etching May be different.
 ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105に第1,第2の凹部107,114を設ける方法は、上述したようなエッチング処理による方法に限定されず、機械加工による方法でも構わない。機械加工による方法では、マシニングセンターやその他数値制御工作機械を用いて、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105に、砥石を接触させた上で回転変位させ、所定の寸法の第1,第2の凹部107,114を形成する。例えば、ダイヤモンド砥粒、CBN砥粒等を電着又はメタルボンドで固定した砥石を用いて、主軸回転数100~30,000rpm、切削速度1~10,000mm/分で研削する。 The method of providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114 on the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 is not limited to the method using the etching process as described above, but a method using machining. It doesn't matter. In the method by machining, a grindstone is brought into contact with the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 using a machining center or other numerically controlled machine tool, and a predetermined dimension is obtained. First and second recesses 107 and 114 are formed. For example, grinding is performed at a spindle speed of 100 to 30,000 rpm and a cutting speed of 1 to 10,000 mm / min using a grindstone in which diamond abrasive grains, CBN abrasive grains or the like are fixed by electrodeposition or metal bond.
 続いて、第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面及び側面を研磨加工して、第1,第2の底面部108,115及び第1,第2の接続面部111,118を形成してもよい。研磨加工工程では、回転研磨ツールの研磨加工部を、第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面及び側面にそれぞれ別個に独立した一定圧力で接触させて、一定速度で相対的に移動させて行う。一定圧力、一定速度の条件で研磨を行うことにより、一定の研磨レートで研削面を均一に研磨できる。回転研磨ツールの研磨加工部の接触時の圧力としては、経済性及び制御のし易さ等の点で1~1,000,000Paが好ましい。速度は、経済性及び制御のし易さなどの点で1~10,000mm/分が好ましい。移動量はガラス基板101の形状、大きさに応じて適宜決められる。回転研磨ツールは、その研磨加工部が研磨可能な回転体であれば特に限定されないが、ツールチャッキング部を有するスピンドル、リューターに研磨ツールを装着させる方式等が挙げられる。回転研磨ツールの材質としては、少なくともその研磨加工部がセリウムパッド、ゴム砥石、フェルトバフ、ポリウレタン等、被加工物を加工除去でき、且つヤング率は7GPa以下が好ましく、5GPa以下がより好ましく、種類は限定されない。回転研磨ツールの材質をヤング率7GPa以下の部材を用いることにより、圧力により研磨加工部を第1,第2の凹部107,114の形状に沿うように変形させて、底面及び側面を上述した所定の表面粗さに加工できる。回転研磨ツールの研磨加工部の形状は円又はドーナツ型の平盤、円柱型、砲弾型、ディスク型、たる型等が挙げられる。 Subsequently, the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are polished to form the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115 and the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118. Also good. In the polishing process, the polishing part of the rotary polishing tool is brought into contact with the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 separately at a constant pressure and moved relatively at a constant speed. Do. By polishing under conditions of constant pressure and constant speed, the ground surface can be uniformly polished at a constant polishing rate. The pressure at the time of contact of the polishing portion of the rotary polishing tool is preferably 1 to 1,000,000 Pa in view of economy and ease of control. The speed is preferably 1 to 10,000 mm / min from the viewpoint of economy and ease of control. The amount of movement is appropriately determined according to the shape and size of the glass substrate 101. The rotary polishing tool is not particularly limited as long as the polishing portion can be polished, and examples thereof include a method of attaching the polishing tool to a spindle and a router having a tool chucking portion. As a material of the rotary polishing tool, at least the polishing portion can process and remove a workpiece such as cerium pad, rubber grindstone, felt buff, polyurethane, etc., and Young's modulus is preferably 7 GPa or less, more preferably 5 GPa or less, and the type is It is not limited. By using a member having a Young's modulus of 7 GPa or less as the material of the rotary polishing tool, the polishing portion is deformed by pressure to conform to the shapes of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, and the bottom surface and the side surface are set as described above. Can be processed to a surface roughness of. Examples of the shape of the polishing portion of the rotary polishing tool include a circular or donut-shaped flat plate, a cylindrical shape, a shell type, a disk type, and a barrel type.
 第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面及び側面に回転研磨ツールの研磨加工部を接触させて研磨を行う場合、研磨砥粒スラリーを介在させた状態で加工を行うことが好ましい。この場合、研磨砥粒としてはシリカ、セリア、アランダム、ホワイトアランダム(WA)、エメリー、ジルコニア、SiC、ダイヤモンド、チタニア、ゲルマニア等が挙げられ、その粒度は10nm~10μmが好ましい。回転研磨ツールの相対移動速度は、上述したように、1~10,000mm/分の範囲で選定できる。回転研磨ツールの研磨加工部の回転数は100~10,000rpmである。回転数が小さいと加工レートが遅くなり、所望の表面粗さにするのに時間がかかりすぎる場合があり、回転数が大きいと加工レートが速くなり、ツールの磨耗が激しくなるため、研磨の制御が難しくなる場合がある。 When polishing is performed by bringing the polishing processing portion of the rotary polishing tool into contact with the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, it is preferable to perform the processing in a state where polishing abrasive slurry is interposed. In this case, examples of the abrasive grains include silica, ceria, alundum, white alundum (WA), emery, zirconia, SiC, diamond, titania, germania, and the like, and the particle size is preferably 10 nm to 10 μm. As described above, the relative moving speed of the rotary polishing tool can be selected in the range of 1 to 10,000 mm / min. The rotational speed of the polishing portion of the rotary polishing tool is 100 to 10,000 rpm. If the number of revolutions is small, the processing rate will be slow, and it may take too much time to achieve the desired surface roughness. If the number of revolutions is large, the processing rate will increase and the wear of the tool will become violent. May be difficult.
 上述したように第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面及び側面をそれぞれ独立の圧力で回転研磨ツールを接触させて研磨加工する場合、圧力の調節は、空気圧ピストン、ロードセル等を使用できる。例えば、回転研磨ツールを第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面に向かって進退させる空気圧ピストンと、回転研磨ツールを第1,第2の凹部107,114の側面に向かって進退させる他の空気圧ピストンと、を設ければ、第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面及び側面に対する研磨加工部の圧力を調整できる。このように、第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面と側面への圧力を独立させ、単独の回転研磨ツールをそれぞれの面に独立した一定圧力で回転研磨ツールを接触させながら、一定速度で相対的に移動させることで、それぞれの面を同時に独立の研磨レートで均一に研磨できる。 As described above, when the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are polished by bringing the rotary polishing tool into contact with each other with independent pressure, a pneumatic piston, a load cell, or the like can be used to adjust the pressure. For example, a pneumatic piston that moves the rotary polishing tool back and forth toward the bottom surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, and other devices that move the rotary polishing tool back and forth toward the side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114. If the pneumatic piston is provided, the pressure of the polishing portion with respect to the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 can be adjusted. In this way, the pressures on the bottom and side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are made independent, and a single rotary polishing tool is brought into contact with each surface at a constant pressure, with a constant speed. , Each surface can be uniformly polished at an independent polishing rate at the same time.
 なお、第1,第2の凹部107,114の形状に沿うように回転研磨ツールとガラス基板101とを相対的に移動させて研磨加工してもよい。移動させる方式は移動量、方向、速度を一定に制御できる方式であればいかなるものでもよい。例えば、多軸ロボット等を用いる方式等が挙げられる。 Note that polishing may be performed by relatively moving the rotary polishing tool and the glass substrate 101 along the shapes of the first and second recesses 107 and 114. Any moving system may be used as long as the moving amount, direction, and speed can be controlled to be constant. For example, a method using a multi-axis robot or the like can be used.
 以上のように、Z方向に対向する少なくとも第1,第2の凹部107,114が形成されたガラス基板101は、その後の化学強化により、薄肉部121が平板状から曲板状に成形される。 As described above, in the glass substrate 101 on which at least the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 facing in the Z direction are formed, the thin portion 121 is formed from a flat plate shape to a curved plate shape by subsequent chemical strengthening. .
 化学強化とは、ガラスの表層のイオン半径が小さいアルカリイオン(例えば、ナトリウムイオン)をイオン半径の大きなアルカリイオン(例えば、カリウムイオン)に置換(イオン交換)することをいう。化学強化の方法としてはガラスの表層のアルカリイオンをよりイオン半径の大きなアルカリイオンとイオン交換できるものであれば特に限定されないが、例えば、ナトリウムイオンを含有するガラスを、カリウムイオンを含む溶融塩で処理することにより実施できる。一般的には、ガラス転移点以下の温度で、硝酸カリウム溶融塩にガラス基材を浸漬し、イオン交換する。硝酸カリウム溶融塩には、炭酸カリウム塩などが混合された混合溶融塩を用いてもよい。また、浸漬に限らず、前記溶融塩のスプレーや前記溶融塩を含む紛体・ペーストなどの塗布の方法を用いてもよい。このようなイオン交換処理が行われるため、ガラス表層の圧縮応力層の組成はイオン交換処理前の組成と若干異なるが、基板厚み中央部の組成はイオン交換処理前の組成とほぼ同じである。その結果、第1の主面3および第2の主面5におけるカリウムイオン濃度がカバー部材1の厚さ方向中央におけるカリウムイオン濃度よりも高くなる。 Chemical strengthening refers to substitution (ion exchange) of alkali ions (for example, sodium ions) having a small ionic radius on the surface layer of glass with alkali ions (for example, potassium ions) having a large ionic radius. The method of chemical strengthening is not particularly limited as long as the alkali ions on the surface layer of the glass can be ion-exchanged with alkali ions having a larger ionic radius. For example, a glass containing sodium ions is replaced with a molten salt containing potassium ions. It can be implemented by processing. In general, the glass substrate is immersed in molten potassium nitrate at a temperature not higher than the glass transition point, and ion exchange is performed. As the potassium nitrate molten salt, a mixed molten salt in which potassium carbonate salt or the like is mixed may be used. In addition to the immersion, a spraying method of the molten salt or a coating method of powder or paste containing the molten salt may be used. Since such an ion exchange treatment is performed, the composition of the compressive stress layer on the glass surface layer is slightly different from the composition before the ion exchange treatment, but the composition at the center of the substrate thickness is almost the same as the composition before the ion exchange treatment. As a result, the potassium ion concentration in the 1st main surface 3 and the 2nd main surface 5 becomes higher than the potassium ion concentration in the thickness direction center of the cover member 1. FIG.
 化学強化ガラスには、表層に圧縮応力層が形成される。カバー部材1の薄肉部21または厚肉部22の圧縮応力層の表面圧縮応力(CS)は上述の範囲に制御される。CSは、表面応力計(例えば、折原製作所製FSM-6000)等を用いて測定できる。 In the chemically strengthened glass, a compressive stress layer is formed on the surface layer. The surface compressive stress (CS) of the compressive stress layer of the thin portion 21 or the thick portion 22 of the cover member 1 is controlled within the above range. CS can be measured using a surface stress meter (for example, FSM-6000 manufactured by Orihara Seisakusho).
 化学強化によりガラス表層のナトリウムイオンと溶融塩中のカリウムイオンとをイオン交換する場合、化学強化によって生じる表面圧縮応力層の深さ(DOL)は任意の方法により測定できるが、例えばEPMA(electron probe micro analyzer、電子線マイクロアナライザー)にてガラスの深さ方向のアルカリイオン濃度分析(この例の場合はカリウムイオン濃度分析)を行い、測定により得られたイオン拡散深さをDOLとしてもよい。また、DOLは表面応力計(例えば、折原製作所製FSM-6000)等を用いても測定できる。また、ガラス表層のリチウムイオンと溶融塩中のナトリウムイオンとをイオン交換する場合、EPMAにてガラスの深さ方向のナトリウムイオン濃度分析を行い、測定により得られたイオン拡散深さをDOLとみなす。カバー部材1の薄肉部21または厚肉部22のDOLは上述の範囲に制御される。 When ion exchange is performed between sodium ions on the glass surface layer and potassium ions in the molten salt by chemical strengthening, the depth (DOL) of the surface compressive stress layer generated by chemical strengthening can be measured by any method. For example, EPMA (electron probe) The alkali diffusion concentration analysis (potassium ion concentration analysis in this example) in the depth direction of the glass may be performed with a micro analyzer (electron beam microanalyzer), and the ion diffusion depth obtained by the measurement may be DOL. The DOL can also be measured using a surface stress meter (for example, FSM-6000 manufactured by Orihara Seisakusho). When ion exchange is performed between lithium ions on the glass surface layer and sodium ions in the molten salt, a sodium ion concentration analysis in the depth direction of the glass is performed with EPMA, and the ion diffusion depth obtained by the measurement is regarded as DOL. . The DOL of the thin portion 21 or the thick portion 22 of the cover member 1 is controlled within the above range.
 カバー部材1(ガラス基板101)の内部引張応力(CT)は、300MPa以下が好ましく、250MPa以下がより好ましく、200MPa以下がさらに好ましく、170MPa以下特に好ましい。 The internal tensile stress (CT) of the cover member 1 (glass substrate 101) is preferably 300 MPa or less, more preferably 250 MPa or less, further preferably 200 MPa or less, and particularly preferably 170 MPa or less.
 化学強化を施す前のガラス基板101又はカバー部材1の歪点は500℃以上が好ましい。化学強化前のガラス基板101又はカバー部材1の歪点が500℃以上であると、表面圧縮応力の緩和が生じにくくなるからである。530℃以上がより好ましく、550℃以上がさらに好ましい。 The strain point of the glass substrate 101 or the cover member 1 before chemical strengthening is preferably 500 ° C. or higher. This is because when the strain point of the glass substrate 101 or the cover member 1 before chemical strengthening is 500 ° C. or more, the surface compressive stress is hardly relaxed. 530 ° C. or higher is more preferable, and 550 ° C. or higher is more preferable.
 ここで、化学強化は、凹部形成工程後のみ行ってもよいが、凹部形成工程前後に行うことが好ましい。すなわち、カバー部材1の製造方法は、ガラス基板101を化学強化する工程(第1化学強化工程)と、ガラス基板101に第1,第2の凹部107,114を設ける凹部形成工程と、第1,第2の凹部107,114が設けられたガラス基板101を再度化学強化する工程(第2化学強化工程)と、を含むことが好ましい。これによれば、先ず、第1化学強化工程において、第1,第2の凹部107,114が設けられていないガラス基板101の全体に通常の平坦なカバー部材と同等のCS、DOLが与えられる。次いで、凹部形成工程において、第1,第2の凹部107,114を設けることによって強化されていない薄肉部121を露出させる。さらに、第2化学強化工程において、再び薄肉部121が破壊しない程度、且つ、平板状の薄肉部121が図2(A)に示すような薄肉部21のように曲板状に成形されるような強化条件で再強化を行う。したがって、厚肉部122に十分な強度を持たせながら薄肉部121にも好適な強度を与えられる。 Here, chemical strengthening may be performed only after the recess forming step, but is preferably performed before and after the recess forming step. That is, the manufacturing method of the cover member 1 includes a step of chemically strengthening the glass substrate 101 (first chemical strengthening step), a recess forming step of providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114 in the glass substrate 101, a first And a step of chemically strengthening the glass substrate 101 provided with the second recesses 107 and 114 again (second chemical strengthening step). According to this, first, in the first chemical strengthening step, CS and DOL equivalent to a normal flat cover member are given to the entire glass substrate 101 in which the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are not provided. . Next, in the recess forming step, the thin portion 121 that is not strengthened is exposed by providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114. Furthermore, in the second chemical strengthening step, the thin-walled portion 121 is not broken again, and the flat thin-walled portion 121 is formed into a curved plate shape like the thin-walled portion 21 as shown in FIG. Re-strengthen under appropriate strengthening conditions. Therefore, suitable strength can be given to the thin portion 121 while giving the thick portion 122 sufficient strength.
 このように、凹部形成工程前後に化学強化を行う場合には、第1化学強化工程においてガラス基板101を400~500℃に加熱された30~100%のKNO溶融塩に1~24時間に亘って接触させ、第2化学強化工程においてガラス基板101を350~450℃に加熱された70~100%のKNO溶融塩に1分~3時間に亘って接触させることが好ましい。その条件によれば、厚肉部122の最表面のCSを400~1300MPa、DOLを15~100μm、変曲点におけるCS、DOLをそれぞれ10~1000MPa、1~24μmとし、薄肉部121のCSを300~1300MPa、DOLを5~25μmとできる。 Thus, when chemical strengthening is performed before and after the recess forming step, the glass substrate 101 is heated to 400 to 500 ° C. in 30 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt in the first chemical strengthening step in 1 to 24 hours. In the second chemical strengthening step, the glass substrate 101 is preferably brought into contact with 70 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 350 to 450 ° C. for 1 minute to 3 hours. According to the conditions, the outermost surface CS of the thick portion 122 is 400 to 1300 MPa, the DOL is 15 to 100 μm, the CS and DOL at the inflection point are 10 to 1000 MPa, and 1 to 24 μm, respectively. 300 to 1300 MPa, DOL can be 5 to 25 μm.
 ここで、「変曲点におけるCS、DOL」の求め方について説明する。図8には、二種類の異なる化学強化条件におけるCS-DOLプロファイルが示されている。異なる条件1、2で化学強化を行ったガラスにおいて、CSとDOLの関係を表す曲線はそれぞれ曲線a,aとなる。曲線a,aの形状は互いに異なる。また、曲線aのCS及びDOLはCS及びDOLで表され、曲線aのCS及びDOLはCS及びDOLで表され、両者の値はそれぞれ異なる。上述のように、ガラス基板101に対し二段階の化学強化を実施した場合、特に条件1で化学強化したガラス基板101に引き続いて条件2で化学強化した場合を考える。この場合、図9に示すように、ガラス基板101の厚肉部122のCSとDOLの関係を表す曲線Aは、上記曲線a,aを重畳したような曲線となる。図10に示すように、曲線AのCS及びDOLはCS及びDOLで表される。このようなガラス基板101の厚肉部122を表面応力計により測定すると、最表面(X軸において0の位置)とDOLとの間に、変曲点Pが観察される。変曲点Pは、二段階の化学強化条件に形状が変化するため、どこが変曲点Pであるか判断が難しいことがある。そこで、変曲点Pの代替として交点Qを求め、交点Qの値を上述した「変曲点におけるCS、DOL」とみなした。交点Qは、曲線A上の(0、CS)における接線kと、(DOL、0)における接線をkと、の交点である。そして、交点QのY座標及びX座標の値であるCS及びDOLが、「変曲点におけるCS及びDOL」とみなされる。 Here, how to obtain “CS and DOL at the inflection point” will be described. FIG. 8 shows the CS-DOL profile under two different chemical strengthening conditions. In glasses subjected to chemical strengthening under different conditions 1 and 2, curves representing the relationship between CS and DOL are curves a 1 and a 2 , respectively. The shapes of the curves a 1 and a 2 are different from each other. Moreover, CS and DOL of the curve a 1 are represented by CS 1 and DOL 1 , and CS and DOL of the curve a 2 are represented by CS 2 and DOL 2 , and the values of both are different. As described above, when the two-step chemical strengthening is performed on the glass substrate 101, a case where the glass substrate 101 chemically strengthened under the condition 1 is subsequently chemically strengthened under the condition 2 is considered. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9, the curve A representing the relationship between CS and DOL of the thick portion 122 of the glass substrate 101 is a curve in which the curves a 1 and a 2 are superimposed. As shown in FIG. 10, CS and DOL of the curve A are represented by CS A and DOL A. When such a thick portion 122 of the glass substrate 101 is measured by a surface stress meter, an inflection point P is observed between the outermost surface (position 0 on the X axis) and DOL A. Since the inflection point P changes its shape under two-stage chemical strengthening conditions, it may be difficult to determine where the inflection point P is. Therefore, the intersection point Q is obtained as an alternative to the inflection point P, and the value of the intersection point Q is regarded as the above-described “CS and DOL at the inflection point”. The intersection point Q is an intersection point between the tangent line k 1 at (0, CS A ) on the curve A and the tangent line at (DOL A , 0) with k 2 . Then, CS Q and DOL Q which are the values of the Y coordinate and the X coordinate of the intersection point Q are regarded as “CS and DOL at the inflection point”.
 なお、上述した機械加工で薄肉部121を曲板状に形成する場合、薄肉部121の第1の底面部108及び第2の底面部115のうち少なくとも一方には、薄肉部121の化学強化時に所望の曲面形状に制御するため、膜が形成されていてもよい。不図示であるが、このような膜としては、第1の底面部108に形成される表面膜や、第2の底面部115に形成される裏面膜や、第1,第2の接続面部111,118に形成される側面膜等が挙げられる。 When the thin portion 121 is formed into a curved plate shape by the above-described machining, at least one of the first bottom surface portion 108 and the second bottom surface portion 115 of the thin portion 121 is subjected to chemical strengthening of the thin portion 121. In order to control to a desired curved surface shape, a film may be formed. Although not shown, such films include a surface film formed on the first bottom surface portion 108, a back surface film formed on the second bottom surface portion 115, and the first and second connection surface portions 111. , 118 and the like.
 これらの膜は、それぞれ膜が形成された部分が化学強化されることを抑制する。化学強化抑制効果を発揮するためには、膜は酸化物や窒化物、炭化物、ホウ化物、ケイ化物、金属等を含むことが好ましい。なぜなら、前記のような物質を含む膜は、膜中でのナトリウムイオンやカリウムイオンの拡散係数がガラス中のそれより小さくなるからである。 These films suppress chemical strengthening of the part where the film is formed. In order to exhibit the chemical strengthening suppressing effect, the film preferably contains an oxide, nitride, carbide, boride, silicide, metal or the like. This is because a film containing such a substance has a smaller diffusion coefficient of sodium ions and potassium ions in the film than in glass.
 上記酸化物としては、例えば、無アルカリ酸化物、アルカリ元素又はアルカリ土類元素を含む複合酸化物が挙げられるが、特にSiOが好ましい。主成分としてSiOを適用することにより、膜中でナトリウムイオンやカリウムイオンの拡散が適度に抑制される。また、膜の透過率が高く、屈折率がガラスと近いため、コーティングを施したことによる外観変化を最小限に抑えられる。また、SiOを主成分とする膜は、物理的耐久性や化学的耐久性も高い。 Examples of the oxide include a non-alkali oxide, a complex oxide containing an alkali element or an alkaline earth element, and SiO 2 is particularly preferable. By applying SiO 2 as the main component, diffusion of sodium ions and potassium ions in the film is moderately suppressed. Further, since the transmittance of the film is high and the refractive index is close to that of glass, the appearance change due to the coating can be minimized. Also, film composed mainly of SiO 2, the physical durability and chemical durability is high.
 膜の膜厚は10nm以上が好ましく、12nm以上がより好ましく、15nm以上がさらに好ましく、20nm以上が特に好ましく、25nm以上が最も好ましい。膜厚が10nm以上であると、イオン交換阻害の効果により膜が形成された部分の化学強化が抑制できる。膜の膜厚が厚くなるほど、化学強化抑制効果が高くなり、曲面形状を制御できる。 The film thickness is preferably 10 nm or more, more preferably 12 nm or more, further preferably 15 nm or more, particularly preferably 20 nm or more, and most preferably 25 nm or more. When the film thickness is 10 nm or more, chemical strengthening of the portion where the film is formed can be suppressed due to the effect of inhibiting ion exchange. As the film thickness increases, the chemical strengthening suppression effect increases and the curved surface shape can be controlled.
 膜の膜厚は1000nm以下が好ましく、500nm以下がより好ましく、200nm以下がさらに好ましく、100nm以下が特に好ましく、50nm以下が最も好ましい。膜厚が1000nmを超えると、薄肉部121の強化が入りにくくなるおそれがある。また、膜がある部位とない部位の外観の差が大きくなるおそれがある。 The film thickness is preferably 1000 nm or less, more preferably 500 nm or less, further preferably 200 nm or less, particularly preferably 100 nm or less, and most preferably 50 nm or less. If the film thickness exceeds 1000 nm, the thin portion 121 may not be easily strengthened. Moreover, there is a possibility that the difference in appearance between the site with and without the film becomes large.
 なお、カバー部材1は、機械加工で薄肉部121が曲板状に形成されている場合、化学強化処理が施されていないガラスであってもよい。すなわち、ガラス基板101には必ずしも化学強化処理を施す必要はない。 Note that the cover member 1 may be glass that has not been subjected to chemical strengthening when the thin-walled portion 121 is formed into a curved plate shape by machining. That is, the glass substrate 101 does not necessarily need to be subjected to chemical strengthening treatment.
 また、上述したように、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105には、それぞれ対向する複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114を設けても構わない。例えば、図11に示すように、カバー部材1裏に配置すべきセンサ40Hやカメラモジュール42H等の各種装置の数が複数である場合、センサ40Hやカメラモジュール42H等の個数と同数の第1,第2の凹部107,114を設ければよい。なお、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105には、対向する第1,第2の凹部107,114のほかに、対向しない凹部を形成してもよい。 Also, as described above, the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 may be provided with a plurality of first and second concave portions 107 and 114 that face each other. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, when the number of various devices such as the sensor 40H and the camera module 42H to be arranged on the back of the cover member 1 is plural, the same number of first and first devices as the number of the sensors 40H, the camera module 42H, etc. The second recesses 107 and 114 may be provided. The first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 may be formed with recesses that do not face each other in addition to the first and second recesses 107 and 114 that face each other.
 図11には、センサ40H、カメラモジュール42H、及び液晶層(表示パネル)44Hをスマートフォン等の筐体43Hに収納した状態が示されている。ここで、カバー部材1には、第1の凹部7Hと、第2の凹部14Hとが設けられている。第1の凹部7Hは、第1の主面3側に曲面状に突出する第1の底面部8Hと、第1の接続面部11Hとを備え、第2の凹部14Hは、第1の底面部8Hとで挟まれた領域で曲板状の薄肉部21Hを構成する第2の底面部15Hと、第2の接続面部18Hとを備えている。
 センサ40Hは、接着層41を介して図11中右側の第2の底面部15Hに固定されている。液晶層44Hは、接着層45Hを介してカバー部材1の第2の主面5に固定される。また、カメラモジュール42Hは、レンズ側の先端部が筐体43Hに固定される。このような構成において、カメラモジュール42Hの先端部が、筐体43Hよりも外側に延在してしまうことがある。しかしながら、図示の例のように、カメラモジュール42Hと対向する位置において、カバー部材1の第2の主面5に第2の凹部14Hを設けることで、第2の凹部14Hにカメラモジュール42Hの基部を収納し、カメラモジュール42Hの厚みを吸収できる。これにより、薄肉化の進む機器のカメラ部を含むフラッシュサーフェイス化に貢献できる。また、カメラモジュール42Hの先端部と基部を逆にして、カメラモジュール42Hのレンズをカバー部材1の第2の凹部14Hに固定してもよい。これにより、カバー部材1の薄肉部21Hが、一眼レフカメラのレンズでよく用いられている「レンズプロテクター」のように機能し、カメラレンズの保護や埃の侵入を防ぐ効果がある。なお、この場合、第2の凹部14Hの底面(薄肉部21Hの第2の底面部15H)は光学研磨が必要になり、第2の凹部14Hの第2の接続面部18Hは遮光される必要がある。指紋を付着しにくくするAFP膜やMgF等の反射防止膜等を、第2の凹部14Hや、薄肉部21Hの第2の底面部15Hに形成してもよい。
FIG. 11 shows a state where the sensor 40H, the camera module 42H, and the liquid crystal layer (display panel) 44H are housed in a housing 43H such as a smartphone. Here, the cover member 1 is provided with a first recess 7H and a second recess 14H. The first recess 7H includes a first bottom surface portion 8H protruding in a curved shape on the first main surface 3 side and a first connection surface portion 11H, and the second recess 14H is a first bottom surface portion. In the region sandwiched between 8H, a second bottom surface portion 15H constituting a curved plate-like thin portion 21H and a second connection surface portion 18H are provided.
The sensor 40H is fixed to the second bottom surface portion 15H on the right side in FIG. The liquid crystal layer 44H is fixed to the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via the adhesive layer 45H. The camera module 42H has a lens-side tip fixed to the housing 43H. In such a configuration, the tip of the camera module 42H may extend outward from the housing 43H. However, as shown in the example in the figure, by providing the second recess 14H on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 at a position facing the camera module 42H, the base of the camera module 42H is provided in the second recess 14H. And the thickness of the camera module 42H can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the flash surface including the camera part of the device which is becoming thinner. Alternatively, the lens of the camera module 42H may be fixed to the second recess 14H of the cover member 1 with the tip and base of the camera module 42H reversed. Thereby, the thin portion 21H of the cover member 1 functions like a “lens protector” often used in lenses of single-lens reflex cameras, and has an effect of protecting the camera lens and preventing dust from entering. In this case, the bottom surface of the second recess 14H (the second bottom surface portion 15H of the thin portion 21H) needs to be optically polished, and the second connection surface portion 18H of the second recess 14H needs to be shielded from light. is there. An anti-reflection film such as an AFP film or MgF 2 that makes it difficult to attach a fingerprint may be formed on the second concave portion 14H or the second bottom surface portion 15H of the thin portion 21H.
 また、第1,第2の凹部7H,14Hの形状は特に限定されず、任意の形状を適用して構わない。例えば、第1,第2の凹部7H,14HのZ方向から見た断面形状は、長円状に限定されず、例えば円形状や楕円形状、三角形形状、矩形形状等が適用できる。 The shape of the first and second recesses 7H and 14H is not particularly limited, and any shape may be applied. For example, the cross-sectional shape seen from the Z direction of the first and second recesses 7H and 14H is not limited to an oval shape, and for example, a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a triangular shape, a rectangular shape, or the like can be applied.
 カバー部材1の第1の主面3又は第2の主面5には、防眩処理(anti-glare)による防眩処理層を形成してもよく、その他、反射防止層、防汚層、防曇層等の機能層を形成してよい。機能層はカバー部材1の第1の主面3に形成されることが好ましい。
 防眩処理としては、フッ酸等によるエッチングによる処理や、コーティングによる処理等が挙げられる。エッチング処理による場合には、エッチング後に化学強化してもよく、化学強化後にエッチングしてもよいが、化学強化を行う前にエッチングが行われるのが好ましい。コーティング処理による場合には、コーティング後に化学強化してもよく、化学強化後にコーティングしてもよい。コーティング処理による防眩処理層の場合、カバー部材1の厚さ方向断面視で厚肉部中央部の組成と防眩処理層の組成とを異なるようにできる。これによりカバー部材1より防眩処理層の屈折率を低くなるように組成変更でき、反射防止効果も得られるようになる。防眩処理層の成分が無機系材料である場合には、エッチング処理又はコーティング処理のどちらでもよく、防眩処理層の成分が有機系材料である場合には、コーティング処理を行えばよい。なお、防眩処理層の上には、耐指紋コート(Anti‐Fingerprint:AFP)層を形成してもよい。また、カバー部材や防眩処理層の最表面にフッ素又は塩素などが存在する層が配されるように、例えば無機フッ化物や無機塩化物を形成してもよい。これにより親水性が向上するため、水により汚れを洗浄しやすくなる。
The first main surface 3 or the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 may be formed with an anti-glare treatment layer by anti-glare, and in addition, an antireflection layer, an antifouling layer, A functional layer such as an antifogging layer may be formed. The functional layer is preferably formed on the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1.
Examples of the antiglare treatment include a treatment by etching with hydrofluoric acid, a treatment by coating, and the like. In the case of the etching treatment, chemical strengthening may be performed after the etching, or etching may be performed after the chemical strengthening, but the etching is preferably performed before the chemical strengthening. In the case of a coating treatment, chemical strengthening may be performed after coating, or coating may be performed after chemical strengthening. In the case of the antiglare treatment layer by the coating treatment, the composition of the central portion of the thick portion and the composition of the antiglare treatment layer can be made different from each other in the thickness direction sectional view of the cover member 1. Accordingly, the composition can be changed so that the refractive index of the antiglare layer is lower than that of the cover member 1, and an antireflection effect can be obtained. When the component of the antiglare treatment layer is an inorganic material, either an etching treatment or a coating treatment may be performed, and when the component of the antiglare treatment layer is an organic material, a coating treatment may be performed. Note that an anti-fingerprint (AFP) layer may be formed on the antiglare layer. Further, for example, an inorganic fluoride or an inorganic chloride may be formed so that a layer having fluorine or chlorine exists on the outermost surface of the cover member or the antiglare treatment layer. As a result, the hydrophilicity is improved, so that the dirt can be easily washed with water.
 防眩処理領域50が図12(A)~(C)に示すように第1の凹部7内部及び周縁部に施される場合、使用者が視認せずとも触感でセンサの位置を瞬時に判断でき、防眩処理の凹凸による摩擦で指のスライド時間を確保し認証確率を向上できる効果が得られる。更に防眩処理領域50は図13(A)~(C)に示すようにカバー部材1の第1の凹部7の周縁部の少なくとも一部に施されていることが好ましい。第2の凹部14にセンサが配置され、第1の凹部7に触れた指の指紋などを検出する。第1の凹部7の周縁部に防眩処理領域50を設けることで検出感度を維持できるようになる。 When the anti-glare treatment region 50 is applied to the inside and the peripheral portion of the first recess 7 as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, the position of the sensor is instantly determined by tactile sensation without being visually recognized by the user. It is possible to obtain an effect of securing the finger sliding time and improving the authentication probability by friction due to the unevenness of the anti-glare treatment. Further, the antiglare treatment region 50 is preferably provided on at least a part of the peripheral edge of the first recess 7 of the cover member 1 as shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to (C). A sensor is disposed in the second recess 14 to detect a fingerprint of a finger touching the first recess 7. The detection sensitivity can be maintained by providing the antiglare treatment region 50 at the peripheral edge of the first recess 7.
 なお、防眩処理層の上には、例えば図14(A)~(D)及び図15(A)~(D)に示すように防指紋コート層52を形成してもよい。防指紋コート層52をカバー部材1の第1の主面3全面に形成してもよい。これによりカバー部材1を指で触れても指紋が付きにくくなり、汚れても拭き取りやすくなる。また指紋認証を実施する際など指で頻繁に触れる薄肉部21の第1の底面部8に防指紋コート層52を形成してもよい。防指紋コート層52の材料が静電気を生じやすい場合、センサの種類により静電気が検出感度を低下させてしまう恐れがある。この場合には、図14(C),(D)、図15(A)~(D)に示すようにカバー部材1の第1の凹部7以外の厚肉部22(図3参照)の第1の主面3のみに施されていてもよい。なお、前記した機能層形成は、ガラス基板101(図7(A)参照)に予め形成してもよい。
 なお、上述の図12~図15、後述の図16に示すカバー部材1は、図2に示すものと同じ構成を有しているが、図中の各構成を示す符号の一部を省略してある。
Note that an anti-fingerprint coat layer 52 may be formed on the anti-glare treatment layer, for example, as shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 15 (A) to (D). The fingerprint-proof coating layer 52 may be formed on the entire first main surface 3 of the cover member 1. Thereby, even if the cover member 1 is touched with a finger, a fingerprint is difficult to be attached, and even if it is dirty, it is easy to wipe it off. Further, the fingerprint-proof coating layer 52 may be formed on the first bottom surface portion 8 of the thin-walled portion 21 that is frequently touched with a finger such as when performing fingerprint authentication. When the material of the anti-fingerprint coat layer 52 is likely to generate static electricity, the static electricity may reduce detection sensitivity depending on the type of sensor. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 14 (C), (D), and FIGS. 15 (A) to (D), the thick portions 22 (see FIG. 3) of the cover member 1 other than the first concave portions 7 are used. It may be applied only to one main surface 3. Note that the functional layer formation described above may be formed in advance on the glass substrate 101 (see FIG. 7A).
Note that the cover member 1 shown in FIGS. 12 to 15 and FIG. 16 described later has the same configuration as that shown in FIG. 2, but some of the reference numerals indicating the respective components in the figure are omitted. It is.
 また、カバー部材1の第1の主面3及び第2の主面5は、研磨されることが好ましい。イオン交換による化学強化を施した強化ガラス板は、その最表面に欠陥が発生する。また、最大で1μm程度の微細な凹凸が残留することがある。カバー部材1に力が作用する場合、前述の欠陥や微細な凹凸が存在する箇所に応力が集中し、理論強度よりも小さな力でも割れることがある。そのため、化学強化後のカバー部材1の第1の主面3及び第2の主面5に存在する、欠陥及び微細な凹凸を有する層(欠陥層)を研磨により除去する。なお、欠陥が存在する欠陥層の厚さは、化学強化の条件にもよるが、通常、0.01~0.5μmである。この研磨は、例えば両面研磨装置によって行われる。両面研磨装置は、それぞれ所定の回転比率で回転駆動されるリングギヤ及びサンギヤを有するキャリア装着部と、キャリア装着部を挟んで互いに逆回転駆動される金属製の上定盤及び下定盤と、を有して構成され、キャリア装着部には、リングギヤ及びサンギヤと噛合する複数のキャリアが装着される。キャリアは自らの中心を軸に自転し、且つサンギヤを軸に公転するように遊星歯車運動し、遊星歯車運動によりキャリアに装着された複数のカバー部材1の両面(第1の主面3及び第2の主面5)が上定盤及び下定盤との摩擦で研磨される。 Further, the first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 are preferably polished. A tempered glass sheet subjected to chemical strengthening by ion exchange has defects on its outermost surface. In addition, fine irregularities of up to about 1 μm may remain. When a force acts on the cover member 1, the stress concentrates on a location where the above-described defect or fine unevenness exists, and the cover member 1 may be broken even with a force smaller than the theoretical strength. For this reason, the layer (defect layer) having defects and fine irregularities existing on the first main surface 3 and the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 after chemical strengthening is removed by polishing. The thickness of the defect layer in which defects are present is usually 0.01 to 0.5 μm although it depends on the conditions of chemical strengthening. This polishing is performed by, for example, a double-side polishing apparatus. The double-side polishing apparatus has a carrier mounting portion having a ring gear and a sun gear that are driven to rotate at a predetermined rotation ratio, and a metal upper surface plate and a lower surface plate that are driven to rotate reversely with respect to the carrier mounting portion. The carrier mounting portion is mounted with a plurality of carriers that mesh with the ring gear and the sun gear. The carrier rotates on its own center as an axis and moves in a planetary gear so as to revolve around the sun gear, and both sides of the plurality of cover members 1 (the first main surface 3 and the first main surface 3 and the first main surface 3) mounted on the carrier by the planetary gear movement. 2 main surface 5) is polished by friction with the upper surface plate and the lower surface plate.
 さらに、カバー部材1の第2の主面5には印刷層が設けられてもよい。印刷層は、例えば、所定の色材を含むインク組成物により形成できる。このインク組成物は、色材の他、必要に応じてバインダー、分散剤や溶剤などを含むものである。色材は、顔料や染料などいずれの色材(着色剤)であってもよく、単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用できる。なお、色材は所望される色によって適宜選択できるが、例えば、遮光性が求められる場合には、黒系色材等が好ましく用いられる。また、バインダーは、特に制限されず、例えば、ポリウレタン系樹脂、フェノール系樹脂、エポキシ系樹脂、尿素メラミン系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、フェノキシ樹脂、メタクリル系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリエステル系樹脂、ポリオレフィン系樹脂、ポリスチレン系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル、塩化ビニル-酢酸ビニル共重合体、ポリ酢酸ビニル、ポリ塩化ビニリデン、ポリカーボネート、セルロース類、ポリアセタール等の公知の樹脂(熱可塑性樹脂、熱硬化性樹脂や光硬化性樹脂など)等が挙げられる。バインダーは単独で又は2種以上を組み合わせて使用できる。 Furthermore, a printing layer may be provided on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1. The print layer can be formed from, for example, an ink composition containing a predetermined color material. In addition to the color material, the ink composition contains a binder, a dispersant, a solvent, and the like as necessary. The color material may be any color material (colorant) such as a pigment or a dye, and can be used alone or in combination of two or more. The color material can be appropriately selected depending on the desired color. For example, when a light shielding property is required, a black color material or the like is preferably used. The binder is not particularly limited, and for example, polyurethane resin, phenol resin, epoxy resin, urea melamine resin, silicone resin, phenoxy resin, methacrylic resin, acrylic resin, polyarylate resin, polyester type Resin, polyolefin resin, polystyrene resin, polyvinyl chloride, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, polyvinyl acetate, polyvinylidene chloride, polycarbonate, celluloses, polyacetal, and other known resins (thermoplastic resin, thermosetting resin) Resin, photocurable resin, etc.). A binder can be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.
 印刷層を形成するための印刷法は特に限定されるものではなく、グラビア印刷法、フレキソ印刷法、オフセット印刷法、凸版印刷法、スクリーン印刷法、パッド印刷法、スプレー印刷法、インクジェット印刷法などの適宜な印刷法を適用できる。 The printing method for forming the printing layer is not particularly limited, and gravure printing method, flexographic printing method, offset printing method, relief printing method, screen printing method, pad printing method, spray printing method, inkjet printing method, etc. The appropriate printing method can be applied.
 第2の底面部15における第2の薄肉部構成部分16又は第2の接続部構成部分17(図2(A)参照)に対応する場所に色彩を付すことで、視覚的に場所を解り易くできる。また、第2の接続部構成部分17に対応する場所を鏡面反射印刷(例えばシルバー印刷)にすると、第2の接続部構成部分17の曲率を持った形状がレンズ効果を示し、第2の接続部構成部分17に対応する反射がカバー部材1の角度を変えても広い角度で反射するため、キラキラして高級感を演出できる。 By adding a color to the place corresponding to the second thin part constituting part 16 or the second connecting part constituting part 17 (see FIG. 2A) in the second bottom face part 15, it is easy to visually understand the place. it can. Further, when the place corresponding to the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 is made by specular reflection printing (for example, silver printing), the shape having the curvature of the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 shows the lens effect, and the second connection Even if the reflection corresponding to the part component 17 is reflected at a wide angle even if the angle of the cover member 1 is changed, it can be sparkled and a high-class feeling can be produced.
 印刷は、第2の凹部14と、カバー部材1の第2の主面5において第2の凹部14が形成されない平坦部分と、で個別に実施されることが好ましい。なぜなら、スクリーン印刷法等の印刷方向では形状追従性がそれ程高くないため、第2の凹部14と、第2の凹部14が形成されない平坦部分と、を一度に印刷することが難しいからである。したがって、これらの部分を個別に印刷することにより高精度な印刷層を形成できる。また、第2の凹部14と第2の凹部14が形成されない平坦部分とで印刷の色彩又はテクスチャを変えて、センサ40の位置を視覚的に分かりやすく表示でき、デザイン上のアクセントとなる。 It is preferable that the printing is performed separately for the second recess 14 and the flat portion where the second recess 14 is not formed on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1. This is because the shape followability is not so high in the printing direction such as the screen printing method, and it is difficult to print the second recess 14 and the flat portion where the second recess 14 is not formed at a time. Therefore, a highly accurate printing layer can be formed by printing these parts individually. Further, the color or texture of printing can be changed between the second concave portion 14 and the flat portion where the second concave portion 14 is not formed, so that the position of the sensor 40 can be visually displayed in an easy-to-understand manner, which is an accent on the design.
 より具体的には図16(A)に示すように、第2の主面5において第2の凹部14が形成されない平坦部分には、スクリーン印刷法等によって第1の印刷層31が設けられる。なお、スクリーン印刷とは、開口部を有するスクリーン上に印刷材料を載置した後、スクリーン上でスキージを押圧摺動させ、スクリーンの開口部から印刷材料を押し出して、開口部のパターンを印刷する方法をいう。また、第2の凹部14は曲面状である第2の底面部15を有するので、第2の凹部14に対してはパッド印刷法が好適である。これにより、第2の凹部14の第2の底面部15全体には第2の印刷層32が形成される。ここで、パッド印刷法とは、表面にインクパターンを設けたやわらかいパッド(例えば、シリコーン製パッド)を、目的基材に押付けてインクパターンを基材表面に転写させて印刷する方法である。パッド印刷は、タンポ印刷と呼ばれることもある。このように、パッド印刷法では、比較的やわらかく形状追従性のよいパッドが用いられるので、第2の底面部15に対する印刷は、パッド印刷法によって行うのが好ましい。一方、スクリーン印刷法等の印刷方法では形状追従性がそれ程高くなく、インクが第2の底面部15に印刷できないため不適である。なお、第1,第2の印刷層31,32に対する印刷の順序は特に限定されない。 More specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, a first printing layer 31 is provided by a screen printing method or the like on a flat portion where the second recess 14 is not formed on the second main surface 5. In the screen printing, after a printing material is placed on a screen having an opening, a squeegee is pressed and slid on the screen, and the printing material is pushed out from the opening of the screen to print a pattern of the opening. Say the method. Moreover, since the 2nd recessed part 14 has the 2nd bottom face part 15 which is a curved surface shape, the pad printing method is suitable with respect to the 2nd recessed part 14. FIG. Thereby, the second printed layer 32 is formed on the entire second bottom surface portion 15 of the second recess 14. Here, the pad printing method is a method in which a soft pad (for example, a silicone pad) provided with an ink pattern on its surface is pressed against a target substrate to transfer the ink pattern onto the substrate surface for printing. Pad printing is sometimes called tampo printing. As described above, in the pad printing method, a pad that is relatively soft and has good shape followability is used. Therefore, printing on the second bottom surface portion 15 is preferably performed by the pad printing method. On the other hand, the printing method such as the screen printing method is not suitable because the shape following property is not so high and the ink cannot be printed on the second bottom surface portion 15. The order of printing on the first and second print layers 31 and 32 is not particularly limited.
 また、図16(B)に示すように、第2の主面5において第2の凹部14が形成されない平坦部分と、第2の底面部15の第2の薄肉部構成部分16と、第2の接続部構成部分17とで個別に印刷しても構わない。この場合、第2の主面5において第2の凹部14が形成されない平坦部分には、スクリーン印刷法等によって第1の印刷層31が設けられる。次に、第2の凹部14の第2の薄肉部構成部分16及び第2の接続部構成部分17には、それぞれパッド印刷法によって第2,第3の印刷層32,33が設けられる。なお、第1~第3の印刷層31~33に対する印刷の順番は特に限定されない。また、第1の印刷層31と第2の印刷層32と第3の印刷層33とで印刷の色彩又はテクスチャを変えることで、センサ40の位置を視覚的に分かりやすく、デザイン上のアクセントとなる。例えば、第1の印刷層31と第2の印刷層32を同色にし、第3の印刷層33を異なる色の印刷とした場合、第3の印刷層33が環状のパターンとして認識されるデザインにできる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, a flat portion where the second concave portion 14 is not formed in the second main surface 5, the second thin portion constituting portion 16 of the second bottom surface portion 15, and the second You may print separately with the connection part component part 17 of this. In this case, the 1st printing layer 31 is provided in the flat part in which the 2nd recessed part 14 is not formed in the 2nd main surface 5 by a screen printing method etc. Next, the second thin portion constituting portion 16 and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 of the second recess 14 are respectively provided with second and third print layers 32 and 33 by a pad printing method. The order of printing for the first to third printing layers 31 to 33 is not particularly limited. Further, by changing the color or texture of printing between the first print layer 31, the second print layer 32, and the third print layer 33, the position of the sensor 40 can be easily visually recognized, and the design accents and Become. For example, when the first print layer 31 and the second print layer 32 are the same color and the third print layer 33 is printed in a different color, the design is such that the third print layer 33 is recognized as an annular pattern. it can.
 なお、第2の主面5において第2の凹部14が形成されない部分等、平坦部分に対する印刷法は、スクリーン印刷法によるものに限られず、印刷層の膜厚等を正確に制御できるものであれば、ロータリースクリーン印刷法、凸版印刷法、オフセット印刷法、スプレー印刷法等によるものでも構わない。また、静電複写法や熱転写法、インクジェット法等によるプリントでも構わない。
 また、第2の凹部14等、曲面状に対する印刷法は、曲面状への追従性が良好であればパッド印刷法に限定されず、例えばスプレー印刷法を採用してもよい。
In addition, the printing method for the flat portion such as the portion where the second concave portion 14 is not formed on the second main surface 5 is not limited to the screen printing method, and the film thickness of the printing layer can be accurately controlled. For example, a rotary screen printing method, a relief printing method, an offset printing method, a spray printing method, or the like may be used. Also, printing by electrostatic copying method, thermal transfer method, ink jet method or the like may be used.
Further, the printing method for the curved surface shape such as the second concave portion 14 is not limited to the pad printing method as long as the followability to the curved surface shape is good, and for example, a spray printing method may be adopted.
 上述したカバー部材1は、図17に示すような、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114が設けられたガラス基板101から、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114をそれぞれ少なくとも一つ含むように分離することによっても得られる。
 図17中、分離されるカバー部材1の外形が破線で示されており、破線に沿うようにガラス基板101を切断することによって、複数のカバー部材1を得られる。なお、切断線は図中破線のように直線であるが、直線である必要はなく曲線でもよい。
The above-described cover member 1 includes at least a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 from a glass substrate 101 provided with a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 as shown in FIG. It can also be obtained by separating them so as to include one.
In FIG. 17, the outer shape of the cover member 1 to be separated is indicated by a broken line, and a plurality of cover members 1 can be obtained by cutting the glass substrate 101 along the broken line. The cutting line is a straight line as shown by a broken line in the figure, but it need not be a straight line and may be a curved line.
 ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105には、それぞれ対向する複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114が設けられる。なお、後述するように、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114は、第1の主面103及び第2の主面105をエッチング処理することによって設けられる。なお、後述するように、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114は、研削加工処理、加熱変形などによっても設けられる。 The first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 are provided with a plurality of first and second concave portions 107 and 114 that face each other. As will be described later, the plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided by etching the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105. As will be described later, the plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are also provided by grinding processing, heat deformation, or the like.
 ガラス基板101は、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114が設けられることにより平板状に形成された複数の薄肉部121と、図示しない接続部(図7(C)参照)を介して複数の薄肉部121に接続する厚肉部122と、を備える。第1,第2の凹部107,114は、X方向及びY方向において所定間隔毎に設けられる。したがって、薄肉部121もX方向及びY方向において所定間隔毎に設けられる。なお、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114は必ずしも所定間隔毎に設ける必要はない。複数種の間隔で配置されていたり、少なくとも一部がランダムな間隔で配置されていてもよい。しかし、複数のカバー部材1を分離する際のスペース効率を向上させるためには、図17に示すように、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114を所定間隔毎に設け、各カバー部材1を隙間なく敷き詰めることが好ましい。 The glass substrate 101 is provided with a plurality of thin portions 121 formed in a flat plate shape by providing a plurality of first and second concave portions 107 and 114, and a connection portion (not shown) (see FIG. 7C). A thick portion 122 connected to the plurality of thin portions 121. The first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction and the Y direction. Therefore, the thin portion 121 is also provided at predetermined intervals in the X direction and the Y direction. The plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are not necessarily provided at predetermined intervals. They may be arranged at a plurality of types of intervals, or at least some of them may be arranged at random intervals. However, in order to improve the space efficiency when separating the plurality of cover members 1, a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided at predetermined intervals as shown in FIG. It is preferable to spread 1 without gaps.
 ここで、薄肉部121の最表面の算術平均粗さRaは、50nm以下が好ましく、45nm以下がより好ましく、30nm以下がさらに好ましい。薄肉部121のヘイズ値は、16%以下が好ましく、15%以下がより好ましく10%以下がさらに好ましい。 Here, the arithmetic average roughness Ra of the outermost surface of the thin wall portion 121 is preferably 50 nm or less, more preferably 45 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less. The haze value of the thin portion 121 is preferably 16% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and still more preferably 10% or less.
 図7(C)に示すように、ガラス基板101の第1,第2の凹部107,114の第1,第2の接続面部111,118は、第1,第2の底面部108,115と滑らかに接続する曲面状が好ましい。第1,第2の接続面部111,118の曲率半径は、第1,第2の凹部107,114の中央部から周縁部に向かって大きくなることが好ましい。第1,第2の接続面部111,118の曲率半径は、第1,第2の底面部108,115の深さ寸法以上に設定されることが好ましい。第1,第2の接続面部111,118の曲率半径は、0.1mm以上2mm以下が好ましい。第1,第2の接続面部111,118と第1,第2の主面103,105との接続部分は、滑らかに連続する曲面状が好ましい。 As shown in FIG. 7C, the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 of the glass substrate 101 are connected to the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115, respectively. A curved shape that connects smoothly is preferable. It is preferable that the curvature radii of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 increase from the central portion of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 toward the peripheral portion. The radii of curvature of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 are preferably set to be greater than or equal to the depth dimensions of the first and second bottom surface portions 108 and 115. The curvature radii of the first and second connection surface portions 111 and 118 are preferably 0.1 mm or more and 2 mm or less. The connecting portion between the first and second connecting surface portions 111 and 118 and the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 is preferably a smoothly continuous curved surface.
 図18(A),(B)に示すように、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105の少なくとも一方には、複数のカバー部材1を分離する際に位置合わせを行うための複数の第1のマーク131及び第2のマーク132が設けられている。図18(A),(B)には、各カバー部材1の外形(図17の破線)のX方向の延長線がAで表され、Y方向の延長線がBで表されている。第1のマーク131は、カバー部材1の近傍において、X方向延長線Aを挟むように一対ずつ配置されると共に、Y方向延長線Bを挟むように一対ずつ配置される。それぞれの第1のマーク131は、一対の第1のマーク片131Aからなる。第1のマーク片131Aは、垂直な二辺から構成される略L字形状である。互いに隣り合う第1のマーク片131Aの一辺は、僅かな隙間を空けて対向する。第2のマーク132は、ガラス基板101の四隅にそれぞれ配置される。第2のマーク132は、垂直の二辺から構成される略十字形状である。第2のマーク132を構成する二辺のうち、X方向延長線Aと平行な辺は、その一部がY方向延長線Bと交わり、Y方向延長線Bと平行な辺は、その一部がX方向延長線Aと交わる。 As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, at least one of the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101 is aligned when the plurality of cover members 1 are separated. A plurality of first marks 131 and second marks 132 for performing are provided. 18A and 18B, the extension line in the X direction of the outer shape (broken line in FIG. 17) of each cover member 1 is represented by A, and the extension line in the Y direction is represented by B. The first marks 131 are arranged in pairs near the cover member 1 so as to sandwich the X-direction extension line A, and paired so as to sandwich the Y-direction extension line B. Each first mark 131 includes a pair of first mark pieces 131A. The first mark piece 131A has a substantially L shape composed of two vertical sides. One side of the first mark pieces 131A adjacent to each other faces each other with a slight gap. The second marks 132 are arranged at the four corners of the glass substrate 101, respectively. The second mark 132 has a substantially cross shape composed of two vertical sides. Of the two sides constituting the second mark 132, a part of the side parallel to the X-direction extension line A intersects with the Y-direction extension line B, and a side parallel to the Y-direction extension line B is a part thereof. Intersects with the X-direction extension line A.
 ガラス基板101からカバー部材1を切断して分離する際に、第2のマーク132の位置を読み取り切断場所を選択し、第1のマーク131の中間部(X方向延長線A又はY方向延長線B)に切断線が来ていることを確認し、正確に切断されているか確認できる。 When the cover member 1 is cut and separated from the glass substrate 101, the position of the second mark 132 is read, the cutting location is selected, and the intermediate portion of the first mark 131 (X-direction extension line A or Y-direction extension line). It can be confirmed that the cutting line has come to B), and whether it is cut correctly.
 次に、ガラス基板101の製造方法について説明する。先ず、各成分の原料を後述する組成となるように調合し、ガラス溶融窯で加熱溶融する。バブリング、撹拌、清澄剤の添加等によりガラスを均質化し、公知の成形法により所定の厚さのガラス板に成形し、徐冷する。任意の成形法により平板状に成形されたガラス部材は、徐冷された後、所望のサイズに切断される。なお、より正確な寸法精度が必要な場合等には、切断後のガラス部材に面取加工や研磨加工を施してもよい。これにより、平面状の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105を有し、全体として平板状であるガラス基板101が得られる。 Next, a method for manufacturing the glass substrate 101 will be described. First, the raw materials of each component are prepared so as to have the composition described later, and heated and melted in a glass melting furnace. The glass is homogenized by bubbling, stirring, adding a clarifying agent, etc., formed into a glass plate having a predetermined thickness by a known forming method, and slowly cooled. A glass member formed into a flat plate shape by an arbitrary forming method is gradually cooled and then cut into a desired size. In addition, when more exact dimensional accuracy is required, the glass member after cutting may be chamfered or polished. Thereby, the glass substrate 101 which has the flat 1st main surface 103 and the 2nd main surface 105, and is flat form as a whole is obtained.
 次に、ガラス基板101に対して化学強化処理を施す(第1化学強化工程)。この第1化学強化工程においては、ガラス基板101を400~500℃に加熱された30~100%のKNO溶融塩に1~24時間に亘って接触させることが好ましい。これにより、ガラス基板101の全体(薄肉部121及び厚肉部122)に通常の平坦なカバー部材と同等のCS、DOLが与えられる。第1化学強化工程によって得られるガラス基板101(厚肉部122)のCSは、400MPa以上が好ましく、500MPa以上がより好ましく、600MPa以上がさらに好ましい。また、同様にDOLは、15μm以上が好ましく、20μm以上がより好ましく、25μm以上がさらに好ましい。 Next, a chemical strengthening process is performed on the glass substrate 101 (first chemical strengthening step). In the first chemical strengthening step, the glass substrate 101 is preferably brought into contact with 30 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 400 to 500 ° C. for 1 to 24 hours. Thereby, CS and DOL equivalent to a normal flat cover member are given to the whole glass substrate 101 (thin wall portion 121 and thick wall portion 122). The CS of the glass substrate 101 (thick portion 122) obtained by the first chemical strengthening step is preferably 400 MPa or more, more preferably 500 MPa or more, and further preferably 600 MPa or more. Similarly, the DOL is preferably 15 μm or more, more preferably 20 μm or more, and further preferably 25 μm or more.
 続いて、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103及び第2の主面105に第1,第2の凹部107,114を設けるための凹部形成工程に移行する。以下に説明する例では、図19(A)に示すように複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114がガラス基板101の第1,第2の主面103,105にそれぞれ設けられる。凹部形成工程では、ガラス基板101の第1,第2の主面103,105に図19(B)に示すような第1,第2のマスク部材201A,301Aを配置した上で、ガラス基板101にエッチング処理が施される。 Subsequently, the process proceeds to a recess forming step for providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114 on the first main surface 103 and the second main surface 105 of the glass substrate 101. In the example described below, a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 are provided on the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101 as shown in FIG. In the recess forming step, first and second mask members 201A and 301A as shown in FIG. 19B are arranged on the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101, and then the glass substrate 101 is placed. Etching is performed on the substrate.
 第1,第2のマスク部材201A,301AのX方向寸法及びY方向寸法は、ガラス基板101の第1、第2の主面103,105全体を覆えるように設定されている。図19(B)の例では、第1のマスク部材201A,301AのX方向寸法及びY方向寸法は、ガラス基板101のX方向寸法及びY方向寸法とほぼ等しい。さらに、第1のマスク部材201A,301Aには、ガラス基板101に複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114を形成するための第1,第2の凹部形成用孔207A,314Aが、X方向及びY方向において所定間隔毎に複数設けられている。したがって、エッチャントが複数の第1,第2の凹部形成用孔207A,314Aを介してガラス基板101の第1、第2の主面103,105に到達し、複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114を形成する。 The X and Y direction dimensions of the first and second mask members 201A and 301A are set so as to cover the entire first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101. In the example of FIG. 19B, the X-direction dimension and the Y-direction dimension of the first mask members 201A, 301A are substantially equal to the X-direction dimension and the Y-direction dimension of the glass substrate 101. Further, the first mask members 201A and 301A have first and second recess formation holes 207A and 314A for forming a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 in the glass substrate 101, respectively. A plurality are provided at predetermined intervals in the direction and the Y direction. Accordingly, the etchant reaches the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101 via the plurality of first and second recess forming holes 207A and 314A, and the plurality of first and second recesses are formed. 107 and 114 are formed.
 以上のように複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114が形成されたガラス基板101には、レーザー刻印又は印刷等の方法で第1のマーク131及び第2のマーク132が付され、図17に示すようなガラス基板101が得られる。そして、第2のマーク132の場所を読み取り切断位置を特定し、ダイヤモンドカッター等の切断工具でガラス基板101を切断することで、複数のカバー部材1が分離される。その後、一対の第1のマーク131の中間部(X方向延長線A又はY方向延長線B)に切断線が通過していることをもって、所望の形状にカバー部材1が分離されたことが確認される。 As described above, the first mark 131 and the second mark 132 are attached to the glass substrate 101 formed with the plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114 by a method such as laser engraving or printing. A glass substrate 101 as shown in FIG. 17 is obtained. Then, the position of the second mark 132 is read, the cutting position is specified, and the glass substrate 101 is cut with a cutting tool such as a diamond cutter, whereby the plurality of cover members 1 are separated. After that, it is confirmed that the cover member 1 is separated into a desired shape when the cutting line passes through the intermediate portion (X-direction extension line A or Y-direction extension line B) of the pair of first marks 131. Is done.
 なお、図20(A)に示すように、第1,第2のマスク部材201B,301Bは、複数のカバー部材1の外形に対応する第1,第2の溝部形成用孔220B,320Bを有してもよい。例えば、このような第1のマスク部材201Bを用いてエッチングを行った場合、図20(B)に示すように、ガラス基板101の第1の主面103に、複数のカバー部材1の外形に対応する溝部140が設けられる。そして、溝部140に沿ってガラス基板101を切断することで、複数のカバー部材1を分離できる。このように、ガラス基板101にカバー部材1の外形に対応する溝部140を予め設けることによって、より正確にカバー部材1を分離できる。また、従来技術のようにカバー部材の外形形状を有するマスクを用意する必要がない。 As shown in FIG. 20A, the first and second mask members 201B and 301B have first and second groove forming holes 220B and 320B corresponding to the outer shapes of the plurality of cover members 1. May be. For example, when etching is performed using such a first mask member 201B, the outer shape of the plurality of cover members 1 is formed on the first main surface 103 of the glass substrate 101 as shown in FIG. Corresponding grooves 140 are provided. The plurality of cover members 1 can be separated by cutting the glass substrate 101 along the groove 140. Thus, by providing the groove part 140 corresponding to the external shape of the cover member 1 in the glass substrate 101 in advance, the cover member 1 can be more accurately separated. Further, it is not necessary to prepare a mask having the outer shape of the cover member as in the prior art.
 また、図21に示すように、それぞれ複数の第1,第2の凹部107,114を含むように、ガラス基板101から複数のカバー部材1を分離しても構わない。例えば、図11に示すように、カバー部材1裏に配置すべきセンサ40やカメラモジュール42H等の各種装置の数が複数である場合、センサ40やカメラモジュール42H等の個数と同数の第1,第2の凹部107,114を設ければよい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a plurality of cover members 1 may be separated from the glass substrate 101 so as to include a plurality of first and second recesses 107 and 114, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, when the number of various devices such as the sensor 40 and the camera module 42H to be arranged on the back of the cover member 1 is plural, the same number of first and first devices as the number of the sensors 40, the camera module 42H, and the like. The second recesses 107 and 114 may be provided.
 上述したように、ガラス基板101からそれぞれ第1,第2の凹部107,114を少なくとも一つ含むように複数のカバー部材1を分離することによって、図7(C)に示したような平板状の薄肉部121を有するカバー部材1を得られる。なお、カバー部材1は、屈曲部を1つ以上有するガラスでもよい。また、第1,第2の凹部107,114は上記屈曲部に形成されてもよい。 As described above, by separating the plurality of cover members 1 from the glass substrate 101 so as to include at least one of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, a flat plate shape as shown in FIG. The cover member 1 having the thin portion 121 is obtained. The cover member 1 may be glass having one or more bent portions. Further, the first and second recesses 107 and 114 may be formed in the bent portion.
 ここで、第1,第2の凹部107,114が形成されたガラス基板101を再度化学強化した後、複数のカバー部材1を分離してもよく、複数のカバー部材1を分離した後、それぞれのカバー部材1を化学強化してもよい。すなわち、前者は、第1化学強化工程、凹部形成工程、第2化学強化工程、(表面研磨工程、)カバー部材分離工程の順であるのに対し、後者は、第1化学強化工程、凹部形成工程、カバー部材分離工程、第2化学強化工程、(表面研磨工程)の順である点で相違する。両者において、表面研磨工程は任意であるが、この工程を実施する場合には、最終化学強化工程(最後に実施された化学強化工程、すなわち第2化学強化工程)の後に実施する。また、カバー部材分離工程後に、端面の面取加工を実施することが好ましい。 Here, after chemically strengthening the glass substrate 101 on which the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are formed again, the plurality of cover members 1 may be separated, and after separating the plurality of cover members 1, respectively. The cover member 1 may be chemically strengthened. That is, the former is in the order of the first chemical strengthening step, the recess forming step, the second chemical strengthening step, and the (surface polishing step) cover member separating step, whereas the latter is the first chemical strengthening step and the recess forming step. It is different in the order of the process, the cover member separation process, the second chemical strengthening process, and the (surface polishing process). In both cases, the surface polishing step is optional, but when this step is performed, it is performed after the final chemical strengthening step (the last chemical strengthening step, that is, the second chemical strengthening step). Moreover, it is preferable to chamfer the end face after the cover member separation step.
 前者及び後者どちらの場合であっても、第1化学強化工程によって、厚肉部22には、凹部を持たない通常の平坦なカバー部材と同等の強度を与えた後、第1,第2の凹部7,14を形成することによって、強化されていない平板状の薄肉部21を露出させ、第2化学強化工程によって、薄肉部21を図2(A)に示すように曲板状に成形すると共に、薄肉部21に可能な範囲で必要な強化を与える。第2化学強化工程においては、カバー部材1又はガラス基板101を350~450℃に加熱された70~100%のKNO溶融塩に1分~3時間に亘って接触させることが好ましい。第2化学強化工程によって得られる薄肉部21のCSは、300MPa以上が好ましく、400MPa以上がより好ましく、500MPa以上がさらに好ましい。また、同様にDOLは、5μm以上が好ましく、7μm以上がより好ましく、10μm以上がさらに好ましい。 In either case of the former or the latter, after the first chemical strengthening step, the thick portion 22 is given the same strength as a normal flat cover member having no recess, By forming the recesses 7 and 14, the flat thin portion 21 that is not strengthened is exposed, and the thin portion 21 is formed into a curved plate shape as shown in FIG. 2A by the second chemical strengthening step. At the same time, the thin-walled portion 21 is given necessary reinforcement as much as possible. In the second chemical strengthening step, the cover member 1 or the glass substrate 101 is preferably brought into contact with 70 to 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 350 to 450 ° C. for 1 minute to 3 hours. The CS of the thin portion 21 obtained by the second chemical strengthening step is preferably 300 MPa or more, more preferably 400 MPa or more, and further preferably 500 MPa or more. Similarly, DOL is preferably 5 μm or more, more preferably 7 μm or more, and even more preferably 10 μm or more.
 前者の場合は、二回の化学強化工程、凹部形成工程、及び表面研磨工程を、全て大板のガラス基板101の状態で行えるので、工程を効率化できる。 In the former case, the two chemical strengthening steps, the recess forming step, and the surface polishing step can all be performed in the state of the large glass substrate 101, so that the steps can be made efficient.
 後者の場合は、第1化学強化工程と凹部形成工程を大板のガラス基板101の状態で行えるので、ある程度工程を効率化できる。また、カバー部材分離後に第2化学強化工程を行って薄肉部21を曲板状に成形するので、研磨装置やイオン交換浴などの設備が小型のものでも対応でき、カバー部材端面まで化学強化でき端面強度を向上しやすい。 In the latter case, since the first chemical strengthening step and the recess forming step can be performed in the state of the large glass substrate 101, the steps can be made more efficient to some extent. In addition, since the second chemical strengthening step is performed after the cover member is separated and the thin portion 21 is formed into a curved plate shape, it is possible to cope with a small equipment such as a polishing apparatus or an ion exchange bath, and the cover member end surface can be chemically strengthened. It is easy to improve the end face strength.
 なお、上述したカバー部材1の製造方法では、第1化学強化工程を、凹部形成工程前に実施していたが、凹部形成工程後に実施しても構わない。この場合、第2化学強化工程は実施しなくてよい。具体的には、凹部形成工程、第1化学強化工程、(表面研磨工程、)カバーガラス分離工程の順で行うか、凹部形成工程、カバーガラス分離工程、第1化学強化工程、(表面研磨工程)の順で行う。表面研磨工程は任意であるが、この工程を実施する場合には、最終化学強化工程(最後に実施された化学強化工程、すなわち第1化学強化工程)の後に実施する。 In addition, in the manufacturing method of the cover member 1 mentioned above, although the 1st chemical strengthening process was implemented before the recessed part formation process, you may implement after a recessed part formation process. In this case, the second chemical strengthening step need not be performed. Specifically, the recess forming step, the first chemical strengthening step, the (surface polishing step), or the cover glass separating step are performed in this order, or the recess forming step, the cover glass separating step, the first chemical strengthening step, (the surface polishing step). ) In this order. The surface polishing step is optional, but when this step is performed, it is performed after the final chemical strengthening step (the last chemical strengthening step, that is, the first chemical strengthening step).
 また、第2化学強化工程は、カバー部材1全体を強化する必要はない。例えば、端面のみに化学強化を実施、屈曲部のみに化学強化を実施、凹部のみに化学強化を実施するなど、カバー部材1の少なくとも一部を化学強化してもよい。これにより、選択的に所望の部位を化学強化できるため、所望の強度に制御できる。さらに、カバー部材1を部分的に化学強化することで、所望の形状に制御できる。 Also, the second chemical strengthening step does not need to strengthen the entire cover member 1. For example, at least a part of the cover member 1 may be chemically strengthened, for example, chemical strengthening is performed only on the end face, chemical strengthening is performed only on the bent portion, and chemical strengthening is performed only on the concave portion. Thereby, since a desired site | part can be chemically strengthened selectively, it can control to desired intensity | strength. Furthermore, the cover member 1 can be controlled to a desired shape by partially chemically strengthening the cover member 1.
(ガラス組成)
 カバー部材1及びガラス基板101としては、例えば、以下の(i)~(vii)の何れか一つのガラスが挙げられる。なお、以下の(i)~(v)のガラス組成は、酸化物基準のモル%で表示した組成であり、(vi)~(vii)のガラス組成は、酸化物基準の質量%で表示した組成である。
 (i)SiOを50~80%、Alを2~25%、LiOを0~10%、NaOを0~18%、KOを0~10%、MgOを0~15%、CaOを0~5%およびZrOを0~5%を含むガラス。
 (ii)SiOを50~74%、Alを1~10%、NaOを6~14%、KOを3~11%、MgOを2~15%、CaOを0~6%およびZrOを0~5%含有し、SiOおよびAlの含有量の合計が75%以下、NaOおよびKOの含有量の合計が12~25%、MgOおよびCaOの含有量の合計が7~15%であるガラス。
 (iii)SiOを68~80%、Alを4~10%、NaOを5~15%、KOを0~1%、MgOを4~15%およびZrOを0~1%含有し、SiOおよびAlの含有量の合計が80%以下であるガラス。
 (iv)SiOを67~75%、Alを0~4%、NaOを7~15%、KOを1~9%、MgOを6~14%、CaOを0~1%およびZrOを0~1.5%含有し、SiOおよびAlの含有量の合計が71~75%、NaOおよびKOの含有量の合計が12~20%であるガラス。
 (v)SiOを60~75%、Alを0.5~8%、NaOを10~18%、KOを0~5%、MgOを6~15%、CaOを0~8%含むガラス。
 (vi)SiOを63~75%、Alを3~12%、MgOを3~10%、CaOを0.5~10%、SrOを0~3%、BaOを0~3%、NaOを10~18%、KOを0~8%、ZrOを0~3%、Feを0.005~0.25%含有し、RO/Al(式中、ROはNaO+KOである)が2.0以上4.6以下であるガラス。
 (vii)SiOを66~75%、Alを0~3%、MgOを1~9%、CaOを1~12%、NaOを10~16%、KOを0~5%含有するガラス。
(Glass composition)
Examples of the cover member 1 and the glass substrate 101 include any one of the following glasses (i) to (vii). The glass compositions (i) to (v) below are compositions expressed in terms of mol% based on oxides, and the glass compositions (vi) to (vii) are expressed in terms of mass% based on oxides. Composition.
(I) 50-80% of SiO 2 , 2-25% of Al 2 O 3 , 0-10% of Li 2 O, 0-18% of Na 2 O, 0-10% of K 2 O, MgO Glass containing 0-15%, CaO 0-5% and ZrO 2 0-5%.
(Ii) SiO 2 and 50 to 74%, the Al 2 O 3 1 ~ 10% , a Na 2 O 6 - 14% of K 2 O 3 - 11% of MgO 2 - 15% CaO 0 to 6% and 0 to 5% of ZrO 2 , the total content of SiO 2 and Al 2 O 3 is 75% or less, the total content of Na 2 O and K 2 O is 12 to 25%, MgO and Glass with a total CaO content of 7 to 15%.
(Iii) SiO 2 68 to 80%, the Al 2 O 3 4 ~ 10% , a Na 2 O 5 ~ 15%, the K 2 O 0 ~ 1%, the MgO 4 ~ 15% and ZrO 2 0 Glass containing ˜1% and the total content of SiO 2 and Al 2 O 3 is 80% or less.
(Iv) SiO 2 67-75%, Al 2 O 3 0-4%, Na 2 O 7-15%, K 2 O 1-9%, MgO 6-14%, CaO 0-0 1% and 0 to 1.5% of ZrO 2 , the total content of SiO 2 and Al 2 O 3 is 71 to 75%, the total content of Na 2 O and K 2 O is 12 to 20% Glass.
(V) SiO 2 60-75%, Al 2 O 3 0.5-8%, Na 2 O 10-18%, K 2 O 0-5%, MgO 6-15%, CaO Glass containing 0-8%.
(Vi) SiO 2 63-75%, Al 2 O 3 3-12%, MgO 3-10%, CaO 0.5-10%, SrO 0-3%, BaO 0-3% Na 2 O 10 to 18%, K 2 O 0 to 8%, ZrO 2 0 to 3%, Fe 2 O 3 0.005 to 0.25%, R 2 O / Al 2 O 3 (wherein R 2 O is Na 2 O + K 2 O) is 2.0 or more and 4.6 or less.
(Vii) a SiO 2 66 ~ 75%, the Al 2 O 3 0 ~ 3% , the MgO 1 ~ 9%, the CaO 1 ~ 12%, 10 ~ 16% of Na 2 O, the K 2 O 0 ~ Glass containing 5%.
(実施例1)
 図17に示すガラス基板101とその製造方法の実施例を説明する。X方向長さ730mm、Y方向長さ920mm、Z方向厚さ0.5mmのガラス基板101を用いた。
Example 1
An embodiment of the glass substrate 101 shown in FIG. 17 and the manufacturing method thereof will be described. A glass substrate 101 having an X-direction length of 730 mm, a Y-direction length of 920 mm, and a Z-direction thickness of 0.5 mm was used.
 先ず、第1化学強化工程において、ガラス基板101を450℃に加熱された60%のKNO溶融塩に10.5時間に亘って浸漬させた。 First, in the first chemical strengthening step, the glass substrate 101 was immersed in 60% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 450 ° C. for 10.5 hours.
 次に、凹部形成工程において、ガラス基板101に、X方向は130mmピッチで5行、Y方向は65mmピッチで13列、合計65個の第1,第2の凹部107,114を形成した(図19(A))。第1,第2の凹部107,114は、X方向長さ10mm、Y方向長さ13mmの長円状にした。また、第1の凹部107のZ方向深さを0.15mm、第2の凹部114のZ方向深さを0.2mmとした。すなわち第1,第2の凹部107,114が設けられることにより形成される平板状の薄肉部121のZ方向厚みは0.15mmとした。 Next, in the recess forming step, a total of 65 first and second recesses 107 and 114 were formed on the glass substrate 101 in the X direction in 5 rows at a pitch of 130 mm and in the Y direction in 13 columns at a pitch of 65 mm (see FIG. 19 (A)). The first and second recesses 107 and 114 were in the shape of an ellipse having an X-direction length of 10 mm and a Y-direction length of 13 mm. The depth of the first recess 107 in the Z direction was 0.15 mm, and the depth of the second recess 114 in the Z direction was 0.2 mm. That is, the thickness in the Z direction of the flat thin portion 121 formed by providing the first and second recesses 107 and 114 was 0.15 mm.
 ガラス基板101の第1,第2の主面103,105に第1,第2の凹部107,114を形成する方法は、以下の通りである。先ず、ガラス基板101の第1,第2の主面103,105にレジスト材を塗布し、露光によりレジスト材に第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面と同サイズの孔(第1,第2の凹部形成用孔207A,314A)を開け、図19(B)に示す第1,第2のマスク部材201A,301Aを形成した。 The method for forming the first and second recesses 107 and 114 on the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101 is as follows. First, a resist material is applied to the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 of the glass substrate 101, and the resist material is exposed to holes having the same size as the bottom surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 (first and second surfaces). The second recess forming holes 207A and 314A) were opened, and the first and second mask members 201A and 301A shown in FIG. 19B were formed.
 次に、第1,第2のマスク部材201A,301Aを第1,第2の主面103,105に配置した状態で、ガラス基板101をフッ酸(HF)を含むエッチング液に浸し、XYZ方向に揺動させながら、おもて側及び第2の凹部形成用孔207A、314AからHF溶液を浸入させ、ガラス基板101をエッチングした。この際、第2の凹部におけるエッチング液の流動を第1の凹部107に比べ活発にした。第1の凹部107の深さが0.15mm且つ第2の凹部114の深さが0.2mmになるまでガラス基板101をエッチングした後、ガラス基板101をHF溶液より引き上げ、レジスト材(第1,第2のマスク部材201A,301A)を剥離し、洗浄・乾燥させた。以上の操作により、図17に示す第1,第2の凹部107,114を有し、かつ、図7(C)に示すような平板状の薄肉部121を有するガラス基板101を作製できた。 Next, in a state where the first and second mask members 201A and 301A are disposed on the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105, the glass substrate 101 is immersed in an etching solution containing hydrofluoric acid (HF), and the XYZ directions The glass substrate 101 was etched by allowing the HF solution to permeate through the front side and the second recess formation holes 207A and 314A. At this time, the flow of the etching solution in the second recess was more active than that in the first recess 107. After etching the glass substrate 101 until the depth of the first recess 107 becomes 0.15 mm and the depth of the second recess 114 becomes 0.2 mm, the glass substrate 101 is pulled up from the HF solution, and a resist material (first , Second mask members 201A, 301A) were peeled off, washed and dried. By the above operation, the glass substrate 101 having the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 shown in FIG. 17 and the flat thin portion 121 as shown in FIG.
 そして、第2化学強化工程において、ガラス基板101を400℃に加熱された100%のKNO溶融塩に7分に亘って接触させ、平板状の薄肉部121を図2(A)に示すように第1の主面103側に突出する曲面状に成形した。 Then, in the second chemical strengthening step, the glass substrate 101 is brought into contact with 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 400 ° C. for 7 minutes so that the flat thin portion 121 is shown in FIG. The first main surface 103 was formed into a curved surface protruding to the side.
 また、ガラス基板101の周縁部には、複数のカバー部材1を分離する際に位置合わせを行うための複数の第1,第2のマーク131,132を形成した。図2(A)に示すように、第1の凹部107の第1の接続面部111(実施例1,2において「第1の凹部107の側面」と言う)、第2の凹部114を構成する第2の底面部115の第2の接続部構成部分117(実施例1,2において「第2の凹部114の側面」と言う)は、それぞれ第1の底面部108(実施例1,2において「第1の凹部107の底面」と言う)、第2の薄肉部構成部分116(実施例1,2において「第2の凹部114の底面」と言う)と滑らかに接続する曲面形状であった。第1の凹部107の底面から側面への曲率半径は、最大約0.4mmであり、第2の凹部114の底面から側面への曲率半径は、最大約0.4mmであった。また、第1,第2の凹部107,114の側面と第1,第2の主面103,105の平坦部との接続部分は、ほぼ垂直であった。 In addition, a plurality of first and second marks 131 and 132 for positioning when separating the plurality of cover members 1 were formed on the periphery of the glass substrate 101. As shown in FIG. 2A, a first connection surface portion 111 of the first recess 107 (referred to as “side surface of the first recess 107” in the first and second embodiments) and a second recess 114 are formed. The second connecting portion component 117 (referred to as “the side surface of the second recess 114” in the first and second embodiments) of the second bottom surface portion 115 is respectively the first bottom surface portion 108 (in the first and second embodiments). It was a curved shape that smoothly connected to the second thin-walled component 116 (referred to as the “bottom surface of the second recess 114” in Examples 1 and 2). . The radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the first concave portion 107 was about 0.4 mm at the maximum, and the radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the second concave portion 114 was about 0.4 mm at the maximum. Further, the connection portions between the side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 and the flat portions of the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 were substantially vertical.
 ガラス基板101は、旭硝子株式会社のアルミノシリケートガラスである、Dragontrail(旭硝子株式会社の登録商標)を使用した。 As the glass substrate 101, Dragontrail (registered trademark of Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), which is an aluminosilicate glass of Asahi Glass Co., Ltd., was used.
(実施例2)
 ガラス基板101とその製造方法の実施例を説明する。実施例1に対して、ガラス基板101として旭硝子株式会社のアルミノシリケートガラスであるDragontrail‐Xを使用した。第1化学強化工程においては、ガラス基板101を450℃に加熱された60%のKNO溶融塩に15時間に亘って接触させた。また第1,第2の凹部107,114の形状を直径10mmの円形として、平板状の薄肉部121を形成した。また、エッチング後、フッ酸(HF)を含むエッチング液からガラス基板101を取り出した後、30秒間そのまま保持してからレジスト材(第1,第2のマスク部材201A,301A)を剥離、洗浄した。第2化学強化工程においては、ガラス基板101を400℃に加熱された100%のKNO溶融塩に10分に亘って接触させ平板状の薄肉部121を図2(A)に示すように第1の主面103側に突出する曲面状に成形した。前記以外は実施例1と同様にしてガラス基板101を作成した。
(Example 2)
Examples of the glass substrate 101 and its manufacturing method will be described. For Example 1, Dragontrail-X, which is an aluminosilicate glass manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd., was used as the glass substrate 101. In the first chemical strengthening step, the glass substrate 101 was brought into contact with 60% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 450 ° C. for 15 hours. Further, the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 were formed into a circular shape having a diameter of 10 mm, and the flat thin portion 121 was formed. Further, after the etching, the glass substrate 101 is taken out from the etching solution containing hydrofluoric acid (HF), and then held for 30 seconds, and then the resist material (first and second mask members 201A and 301A) is peeled off and washed. . In the second chemical strengthening step, the glass substrate 101 is brought into contact with 100% KNO 3 molten salt heated to 400 ° C. for 10 minutes, and the flat thin portion 121 is formed as shown in FIG. 1 was formed into a curved surface protruding toward the main surface 103 side. A glass substrate 101 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except for the above.
 第1,第2の凹部107,114の側面は第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面と滑らかに接続する曲面状であり、第1の凹部107の底面から側面へ曲率半径、第2の凹部114の底面から側面へ曲率半径が、それぞれ最大約0.4mm、最大約0.4mmであった。第1,第2の凹部107,114の側面と、第1,第2の主面103,105の平坦部との接続部分は、滑らかに連続する曲面状であり、その接続部分の曲率半径は約0.4mmであった。第1,第2の凹部107,114の底面から側面への曲率半径は、ガラス基板101側に凹曲する曲率半径であった。第1,第2の凹部107,114の側面から第1,第2の主面103,105の平坦部への形状は、第1,第2の凹部107,114の側面の途中に変曲点がある形状であった。 The side surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 are curved surfaces that smoothly connect to the bottom surfaces of the first and second recesses 107 and 114, and the radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the first recess 107 is the second The radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the recess 114 was about 0.4 mm at the maximum and about 0.4 mm at the maximum, respectively. The connecting portion between the side surfaces of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 and the flat portion of the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 is a smoothly continuous curved surface, and the radius of curvature of the connecting portion is About 0.4 mm. The radius of curvature from the bottom surface to the side surface of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 was a radius of curvature that is concave toward the glass substrate 101 side. The shape from the side surface of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 to the flat portion of the first and second main surfaces 103 and 105 is an inflection point in the middle of the side surface of the first and second concave portions 107 and 114. There was a shape.
(実施例3)
 カバー部材1とその製造方法の実施例を説明する。実施例1又は2のガラス基板101を、ガラス切断用のホイール切断装置を用いて、第1,第2の凹部107,114を1個ずつ有する130mm×65mmの長方形のサイズに切断した。これにより、第1,第2の凹部107,114を1個ずつ有する長方形のカバー部材1を複数得た。切断する時には、第2のマーク132を読んで切断位置を決めた。また、正しく切断されているかどうかは、第1のマーク131の中心に切断線が走っているかどうかを確認し、所定の形状に正しく切断されていることを確認した。第2のマーク132と第1,第2の凹部107,114は位置関係に相関があるので、130mm×65mmの所望の位置に第1,第2の凹部107,114を配置できた。
(Example 3)
An embodiment of the cover member 1 and the manufacturing method thereof will be described. The glass substrate 101 of Example 1 or 2 was cut into a rectangular size of 130 mm × 65 mm having one each of the first and second recesses 107 and 114 using a wheel cutting device for cutting glass. As a result, a plurality of rectangular cover members 1 each having one first and second concave portions 107 and 114 were obtained. When cutting, the second mark 132 was read to determine the cutting position. In addition, whether or not it was cut correctly was confirmed by checking whether or not a cutting line runs in the center of the first mark 131 and confirmed that it was correctly cut into a predetermined shape. Since the positional relationship between the second mark 132 and the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 is correlated, the first and second concave portions 107 and 114 can be arranged at desired positions of 130 mm × 65 mm.
 図22(A)に示すように、長方形のカバー部材1の平面視での四隅の角部2を、CNC(砥石削り)で削り、曲率Rをつけた形状とした。同時にCNCにより面取りを実施した。面取りはR面取り(ガラスエッジを半円状態とする加工)とC面取り(斜めに削りとる処理)等色々できるが、本実施例ではC面取りとした。また、CNC工程では、所定の位置にスピーカ孔4を設けた。なお、スピーカ孔4を予め設けた上で、第1,第2の凹部7,14を形成してもよい。また、スピーカ孔4は、別の工程でエッチングにより設けてもよい。また、スピーカ孔4は、カバー部材1の端面を切り欠くことで設けてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 22 (A), the corners 2 at the four corners of the rectangular cover member 1 in plan view were cut by CNC (grinding stone) to give a shape with a curvature R. At the same time, chamfering was performed by CNC. Chamfering can be done in various ways, such as R chamfering (processing to make the glass edge in a semicircular state) and C chamfering (processing to scrape obliquely), but in this example, it was C chamfering. In the CNC process, speaker holes 4 are provided at predetermined positions. The first and second recesses 7 and 14 may be formed after the speaker hole 4 is provided in advance. Further, the speaker hole 4 may be provided by etching in another process. The speaker hole 4 may be provided by cutting out the end surface of the cover member 1.
 実施例1のガラス基板101から得られたカバー部材1(Dragontrail)においては、厚肉部の最表面のCSが625MPa、DOLが45μm、変曲点のCSが200MPa、DOLが6μm、薄肉部の最表面のCSが625MPa、DOLが6μmであった。実施例2のガラス基板101から得られたカバー部材1(Dragontrail‐X)においては、厚肉部の最表面のCSが800MPa、DOLが45μm、変曲点のCSが250MPa、DOLが6μm、薄肉部の最表面のCSが800MPa、DOLが6μmであった。CSやDOLの測定は有限会社折原製作所のガラス表面応力計 FSM‐6000を用いて測定した。なお、上述したように交点Qの数値を、変曲点のCS及びDOLとした(図8~10参照)。 In the cover member 1 (Dragonrail) obtained from the glass substrate 101 of Example 1, CS at the outermost surface of the thick part is 625 MPa, DOL is 45 μm, CS at the inflection point is 200 MPa, DOL is 6 μm, and the thin part is The outermost surface CS was 625 MPa, and the DOL was 6 μm. In the cover member 1 (Dragonrail-X) obtained from the glass substrate 101 of Example 2, CS of the outermost surface of the thick part is 800 MPa, DOL is 45 μm, CS at the inflection point is 250 MPa, DOL is 6 μm, thin wall The outermost surface CS of the part was 800 MPa, and the DOL was 6 μm. CS and DOL were measured using a glass surface stress meter FSM-6000 manufactured by Orihara Seisakusho. As described above, the values of the intersection point Q are CS and DOL of the inflection points (see FIGS. 8 to 10).
 次に、カバー部材1の第2の主面5に対し、印刷を実施した。この印刷は、黒色の三層31~33を形成するものであり、図16(B)に示した第1~第3の印刷層31~33の形成方法と略同一である。 Next, printing was performed on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1. This printing forms black three layers 31 to 33 and is substantially the same as the method of forming the first to third printing layers 31 to 33 shown in FIG.
 先ず、図22(B)に示すように、カバー部材1の第2の主面5において、スピーカ孔4と、第2の凹部14と、携帯情報端末の表示部に相当する部分(表示領域6)と、を除いた領域に黒印刷を実施し、第1の印刷層31を形成した。次に、図22(C)に示すように、第2の凹部14の第2の薄肉部構成部分16に黒印刷を実施し、第2の印刷層32を形成した。続いて、図22(D)に示すように、第2の凹部14の第2の接続部構成部分17に黒印刷を実施し、第3の印刷層33を形成した。 First, as shown in FIG. 22B, on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1, the speaker hole 4, the second recess 14, and a portion corresponding to the display portion of the portable information terminal (display area 6). ), Black printing was performed on the area except for the first printed layer 31. Next, as shown in FIG. 22C, black printing was performed on the second thin portion constituting portion 16 of the second recess 14 to form the second printed layer 32. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22D, black printing was performed on the second connection portion constituting portion 17 of the second recess 14 to form a third printed layer 33.
 第1の印刷層31はスクリーン印刷により形成され、1回のスクリーン印刷で約4μmのZ方向厚みを印刷した。これを2回実施し、第1の印刷層31のZ方向厚みを約8μmとした。第2の印刷層32はパッド印刷により形成した。1回のパッド印刷で約3μmのZ方向厚みを印刷した。これを3回実施し、第2の印刷層32のZ方向厚みを約9μmとした。第3の印刷層33はパッド印刷により形成した。このパッド印刷を3回実施し、第3の印刷層33のZ方向厚みを約9μmとした。第3の印刷層33は、第1,第2の印刷層31,32とXY方向において重なるよう(Z方向において対向するよう)にした。これにより第2の凹部14を光抜けなく、黒印刷ができた。カバー部材1の第1の主面3(第2の凹部14が形成される第2の主面5と反対側の面)から見ると、色味によっては第2の凹部14の境界がどこにあるかほぼ解らなかった。 The first printing layer 31 was formed by screen printing, and printed in a Z-direction thickness of about 4 μm by one screen printing. This was carried out twice, and the thickness of the first printed layer 31 in the Z direction was about 8 μm. The second printed layer 32 was formed by pad printing. A Z-direction thickness of about 3 μm was printed by one pad printing. This was performed three times, and the thickness of the second printed layer 32 in the Z direction was about 9 μm. The third printed layer 33 was formed by pad printing. This pad printing was performed three times, and the thickness of the third printed layer 33 in the Z direction was about 9 μm. The third print layer 33 was configured to overlap the first and second print layers 31 and 32 in the XY direction (to face each other in the Z direction). As a result, black printing could be performed without light passing through the second recess 14. When viewed from the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1 (the surface opposite to the second main surface 5 on which the second recess 14 is formed), where the boundary of the second recess 14 is located depending on the color. I did n’t understand.
 なお、黒印刷の方法としては、第1の印刷層31の黒印刷を1回とし、第3の印刷層33の印刷が終わった後に、第1の印刷層31の黒印刷を1回実施する方法もある。また、プロセス条件を最適化すれば、第2の凹部14の第2の薄肉部構成部分16と第2の接続部構成部分17を同時に黒印刷し、第2,第3の印刷層32,33を同時に形成できる。 As a black printing method, the black printing of the first printing layer 31 is performed once, and the black printing of the first printing layer 31 is performed once after the printing of the third printing layer 33 is finished. There is also a method. Further, if the process conditions are optimized, the second thin portion constituting portion 16 and the second connecting portion constituting portion 17 of the second recess 14 are simultaneously black printed, and the second and third printed layers 32, 33 are printed. Can be formed simultaneously.
 最後に、カバー部材1の第1の主面3に防指紋コート層(Anti‐Fingerprint)を形成した。防指紋コート層の形成方法は、一般的に溶液塗布法、スプレー法と蒸着法とあるが、本実施例では蒸着法で成膜した。以上により、所望のカバー部材1を作製した。 Finally, a fingerprint-proof coating layer (Anti-Fingerprint) was formed on the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1. The method for forming the anti-fingerprint coating layer is generally a solution coating method, a spray method, and a vapor deposition method. Thus, a desired cover member 1 was produced.
(実施例4)
 携帯情報端末の実施例を説明する。実施例3のカバー部材1の第2の凹部14の第2の底面部15に、指紋認証用センサ40H(図11参照)のセンサ面を当接させて固着した。接着層41のZ方向厚みは約10μmとした。カバー部材1の第2の主面5の非印刷部に、液晶層44H(表示パネル)を接着層45Hを介して積層した。接着層45HのZ方向厚みは約100μmとした。カバー部材1第1の主面3を外側にして、その他の部品とともに筐体43Hに組み込むことによってスマートフォンを作製した。
Example 4
An embodiment of the portable information terminal will be described. The sensor surface of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H (see FIG. 11) was brought into contact with and secured to the second bottom surface portion 15 of the second recess 14 of the cover member 1 of Example 3. The thickness of the adhesive layer 41 in the Z direction was about 10 μm. A liquid crystal layer 44H (display panel) was laminated on the non-printing portion of the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via an adhesive layer 45H. The thickness in the Z direction of the adhesive layer 45H was about 100 μm. A smartphone was produced by incorporating the cover member 1 into the housing 43H together with other components with the first main surface 3 facing outside.
 スマートフォンのディスプレイ側に配置された指紋認証用センサ40H位置のカバー部材外表面には第1の凹部7Hが存在するため、指紋認証用センサ40Hの位置を視覚や触覚等により容易に認識でき、第1の凹部7Hにより指の当接位置がある程度固定されるため、指紋読取が容易になる。 Since the first concave portion 7H exists on the outer surface of the cover member at the position of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H arranged on the display side of the smartphone, the position of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H can be easily recognized by visual or tactile sense. Since the contact position of the finger is fixed to some extent by the one recess 7H, fingerprint reading is facilitated.
(実施例5)
 実施例3のカバー部材1を用いて携帯情報端末を製造する場合には、カバー部材1の薄肉部21の第2の底面部15に、指紋認証用センサ40Hのセンサ面を当接させて固着した。第2の凹部14がカバー部材1の第2の主面5に設けられ、指紋認証用センサ40Hが第2の底面部15に配置される場合は、指紋認証用センサ40Hの機能上問題が無いのであれば、指紋認証用センサ40Hのサイズが第1の凹部7より大きくてもよい。指紋認証用センサ40Hのサイズが第1の凹部7より大きいことで、薄肉部21が薄いカバー部材1の強度を増強できる。より好適には、図5(B)で示したように、第1の凹部7の寸法を、センサ本体46Dの寸法よりも大きく、且つ指紋認証用センサ40D全体の寸法より小さくしてもよい。
(Example 5)
When a portable information terminal is manufactured using the cover member 1 according to the third embodiment, the sensor surface of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H is brought into contact with and fixed to the second bottom surface portion 15 of the thin portion 21 of the cover member 1. did. When the second concave portion 14 is provided on the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 and the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H is disposed on the second bottom surface portion 15, there is no problem in the function of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H. In this case, the size of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H may be larger than that of the first recess 7. Since the size of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40 </ b> H is larger than that of the first recess 7, the strength of the cover member 1 in which the thin portion 21 is thin can be increased. More preferably, as shown in FIG. 5B, the dimension of the first recess 7 may be larger than the dimension of the sensor body 46D and smaller than the dimension of the entire fingerprint authentication sensor 40D.
 またカバー部材1の第2の主面5の非印刷部に、液晶層44H(表示パネル)を接着層45Hを介して積層する。カバー部材1の第1の主面3を外側にして、その他の部品とともに筐体43Hに組み込むことによってスマートフォンなどの携帯情報端末とする。この場合、携帯情報端末の外表面に第1の凹部7が存在するため、印刷によるマーキングがなくてもセンサ位置は容易に認識される。 Further, a liquid crystal layer 44H (display panel) is laminated on the non-printing portion of the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via the adhesive layer 45H. By incorporating the first main surface 3 of the cover member 1 outside and the housing 43H together with other components, a portable information terminal such as a smartphone is obtained. In this case, since the 1st recessed part 7 exists in the outer surface of a portable information terminal, even if there is no marking by printing, a sensor position is easily recognized.
 (実施例6)
 携帯情報端末の他の実施例を説明する。図23に示すように、カバー部材1の第2の凹部14Hに、指紋認証用センサ40Hのセンサ面を当接させて固着した。カバー部材1の第2の主面5の非印刷部に、液晶層44H(表示パネル)を接着層45Hを介して積層する。接着層45HのZ方向厚みは約100μmとした。また他の第2の凹部14Hに、光源48Jを当接させて接着層49Jを介して固着した。接着層49JのZ方向厚みは約10μmとした。カバー部材1の第2の凹部14Hが形成されていない面(第1の主面3)を外側にして、その他の部品とともに筐体43Jに組み込むことによってスマートフォンを作製した。
(Example 6)
Another embodiment of the portable information terminal will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, the sensor surface of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40H is brought into contact with and secured to the second recess 14H of the cover member 1. A liquid crystal layer 44H (display panel) is laminated on the non-printing portion of the second main surface 5 of the cover member 1 via an adhesive layer 45H. The thickness in the Z direction of the adhesive layer 45H was about 100 μm. Further, the light source 48J was brought into contact with the other second concave portion 14H and fixed through the adhesive layer 49J. The thickness of the adhesive layer 49J in the Z direction was about 10 μm. A smartphone was manufactured by incorporating the cover member 1 into the housing 43J together with other components with the surface (first main surface 3) where the second recess 14H is not formed outside.
 カバー部材1のディスプレイ側に配置された光源48Jにより、第1の凹部7Hや第2の凹部14Hを照射すると、その側面において光が散乱されるため、指紋認証用センサ40の位置を視覚や触覚等により容易に認識でき指紋読取が容易になる。 When the first concave portion 7H and the second concave portion 14H are irradiated by the light source 48J arranged on the display side of the cover member 1, light is scattered on the side surfaces thereof, so that the position of the fingerprint authentication sensor 40 is visually or tactilely sensed. The fingerprint can be read easily.
 (実施例7)
 本発明の実施例7である化学強化シミュレーション結果について説明する。例1~4は実施例、例5は比較例である。なお、本発明は以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。
(Example 7)
The chemical strengthening simulation result which is Example 7 of the present invention will be described. Examples 1 to 4 are examples, and example 5 is a comparative example. In addition, this invention is not limited to a following example.
(例1~4)
[カバー部材]
 ガラス基材として厚さT1が0.71mm、主面が70mm×150mmの直方体を使用した。このガラス基材に、図24(A)~(D)に示すように、第1の主面3における第1の凹部7の幅W1、第1の凹部7の深さD1、第2の主面5における第2の凹部14の幅W2、第2の凹部14の深さD2がそれぞれ各図に示す値となるように、第1,第2の凹部7,14を形成し、薄肉部21の厚さT2を0.15mmとした例1~4のカバー部材1を作製した。なお、第1,第2の凹部7,14のY方向の幅は、X方向の幅が23.5mmの場合、6.5mm、X方向の幅が27.5mmの場合、8.5mmとした。
(Examples 1 to 4)
[Cover member]
A rectangular parallelepiped having a thickness T1 of 0.71 mm and a main surface of 70 mm × 150 mm was used as the glass substrate. 24A to 24D, the glass substrate is provided with a width W1 of the first recess 7 on the first main surface 3, a depth D1 of the first recess 7, and a second main surface. The first and second recesses 7 and 14 are formed so that the width W2 of the second recess 14 and the depth D2 of the second recess 14 in the surface 5 are the values shown in the drawings, respectively, and the thin portion 21 is formed. The cover member 1 of Examples 1 to 4 having a thickness T2 of 0.15 mm was manufactured. The first and second recesses 7 and 14 have a Y-direction width of 6.5 mm when the X-direction width is 23.5 mm and 8.5 mm when the X-direction width is 27.5 mm. .
 例1~4のカバー部材1について以下に示す化学強化シミュレーションモデルにより、第1の凹部7に突出部を形成した。すなわち、第1の凹部7の第1の底面部8と第2の凹部14の第2の底面部15とで挟まれる薄肉部21を曲面状にした。化学強化シミュレーションは以下の通り実施した。 For the cover members 1 of Examples 1 to 4, a protrusion was formed in the first recess 7 by the chemical strengthening simulation model shown below. That is, the thin portion 21 sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion 8 of the first concave portion 7 and the second bottom surface portion 15 of the second concave portion 14 is formed into a curved surface. The chemical strengthening simulation was performed as follows.
[化学強化シミュレーション]
 化学強化のシミュレーションには、汎用構造解析「Abaqus」(Ver6.13-2)を用いた。Abaqusの熱伝導解析を用いて「カリウムイオン濃度分布」を「温度分布」とみなして非定常計算した。なお、本シミュレーションに式(1)および式(2)を用い、表1に示す、425℃における硝酸カリウム100mol%溶融塩での材料係数を使用して計算した。
[Chemical strengthening simulation]
General-purpose structural analysis “Abacus” (Ver 6.13-2) was used for the simulation of chemical strengthening. Using “Abacus heat conduction analysis”, “potassium ion concentration distribution” was regarded as “temperature distribution”, and the calculation was unsteady. In addition, it calculated using the material coefficient in 100 mol% potassium nitrate molten salt in 425 degreeC shown in Table 1 using Formula (1) and Formula (2) for this simulation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
 
 ここで、式(1)におけるCはカリウムイオン濃度[mol%]、Cは初期カリウムイオン濃度[mol%]、Ceqは平衡カリウムイオン濃度[mol%]、Dはカリウムイオンの拡散係数[m/s]、Hはカリウムイオンの物質移動係数[m/s]、t:時間[s]、x:ガラス表面からの深さ[m]である。 Here, C x in the formula (1) is a potassium ion concentration [mol%], C 0 is an initial potassium ion concentration [mol%], C eq is an equilibrium potassium ion concentration [mol%], and D is a diffusion coefficient of potassium ion. [M 2 / s] and H are mass transfer coefficients [m / s] of potassium ions, t: time [s], and x: depth [m] from the glass surface.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
 
 ここで、式(2)におけるσは応力[Pa]、Bは膨張係数、Eはヤング率[Pa]、νはポアソン比、Cavgは平均カリウム濃度[mol%]であり、式(3)で求められる。 Here, σ x in equation (2) is stress [Pa], B is an expansion coefficient, E is Young's modulus [Pa], ν is Poisson's ratio, and C avg is an average potassium concentration [mol%]. ).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000003
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000003
 
 ここで、式(3)におけるLは半厚さ[m]、xはガラス表面からの深さ[m]である。 Here, L in the formula (3) is a half thickness [m], and x is a depth [m] from the glass surface.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000004
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000004
 
(例5)
 ガラス基材として厚さが0.71mm、主面が70mm×150mmの直方体を使用した。このガラス基材に、図24の例4と同様のサイズの第1,第2の凹部7,14を形成し例5とした。なお、例5については化学強化を施さないため、化学強化シミュレーションは必要なかった。
(Example 5)
A rectangular parallelepiped having a thickness of 0.71 mm and a main surface of 70 mm × 150 mm was used as the glass substrate. The first and second recesses 7 and 14 having the same size as that of Example 4 in FIG. In Example 5, no chemical strengthening simulation was required because no chemical strengthening was performed.
 図25に示すように、カバー部材1の厚さ方向断面視で第1の底面部8の両端を結ぶ直線(第1の底面部8と第1の接続面部11とが接続される2つの点を結ぶ直線)を第1の基準線L1とする。第2の接続面部18は、第2の凹部14の開口縁と第2の底面部15の外縁とを接続する。第1の基準線L1と平行な線が第1の底面部8を構成する曲線と接する点のうち、第1の基準線L1から最も離れた点を第1の点A1とし、第1の点A1から第1の基準線L1までの垂線の長さ(距離H1)を求めた。結果を表2に示す。 As shown in FIG. 25, the straight line connecting the both ends of the first bottom surface portion 8 in the thickness direction sectional view of the cover member 1 (two points where the first bottom surface portion 8 and the first connection surface portion 11 are connected). Is defined as a first reference line L1. The second connection surface portion 18 connects the opening edge of the second recess 14 and the outer edge of the second bottom surface portion 15. Of the points where the line parallel to the first reference line L1 is in contact with the curve constituting the first bottom surface portion 8, the point that is farthest from the first reference line L1 is defined as the first point A1, and the first point The length of the perpendicular (distance H1) from A1 to the first reference line L1 was determined. The results are shown in Table 2.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000005
 
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000005
 
 例5は、未強化サンプルのため第1の凹部7に突出部はなく(薄肉部21が平板状のままで)、垂線の長さは0μmであった。一方、例1~4については、薄肉部21が曲板状となり、所望の垂線の長さとなる突出部が得られた。以上のことから、例1~4が本発明の実施例に相当し、例5が本発明の比較例に相当することがわかった。
 そして、実際に、実施例に相当する例4のような突出部を備えたカバーガラスを作製したところ、この突出部を備えたカバー部材について、指にて突出部を認識できセンサ等の装置を組み合わせてもその位置を認識できた。一方、比較例に相当する例5では、強化されていないため耐擦傷性が低くなりさらに平坦部の触感が悪く指にフィットしなかった。
Since Example 5 was an unstrengthened sample, there was no protrusion in the first concave portion 7 (the thin portion 21 remained flat), and the length of the perpendicular was 0 μm. On the other hand, in Examples 1 to 4, the thin-walled portion 21 had a curved plate shape, and a protruding portion having a desired perpendicular length was obtained. From the above, it was found that Examples 1 to 4 corresponded to Examples of the present invention, and Example 5 corresponded to Comparative Examples of the present invention.
And actually, when the cover glass provided with the protruding portion as in Example 4 corresponding to the embodiment was produced, with respect to the cover member provided with the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be recognized with a finger, and a device such as a sensor is provided. The position could be recognized even when combined. On the other hand, in Example 5 corresponding to the comparative example, since it was not strengthened, the scratch resistance was low, and the touch feeling of the flat portion was poor and did not fit the finger.
[変形例]
 なお、本発明は上記実施形態にのみ限定されるものではなく、本発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲において種々の改良並びに設計の変更などでき、その他、本発明の実施の際の具体的な手順、及び構造等は本発明の目的を達成できる範囲で変更してもよい。
[Modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various improvements and design changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, specific procedures for carrying out the present invention, The structure and the like may be changed as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved.
(屈曲部を有するカバー部材)
 屈曲部を有するカバー部材は、少なくとも1つ以上の屈曲部を備える。屈曲部と平坦部を組み合わせた形状、全体が屈曲部となる形状などが挙げられるが、屈曲部を有すれば特に形状は限定されない。最近では、屈曲部を有するカバー部材を表示装置に使用する場合、各種機器(テレビ、パーソナルコンピューター、スマートフォン、カーナビゲーション等)において、表示パネルの表示面が曲面となったものが登場している。屈曲部は、表示パネルの形状や表示パネルの筺体の形状などに合わせて作製できる。なお、「平坦部」とは、平均曲率半径が1000mm超である部分を意味し、「屈曲部」とは、平均曲率半径が1000mm以下である部分を意味する。
(Cover member having a bent portion)
The cover member having a bent portion includes at least one bent portion. A shape in which a bent portion and a flat portion are combined, a shape in which the entire portion is a bent portion, and the like can be mentioned, but the shape is not particularly limited as long as the bent portion is provided. Recently, when a cover member having a bent portion is used for a display device, various devices (such as a television, a personal computer, a smartphone, a car navigation system, etc.) in which the display surface of the display panel is curved have appeared. The bent portion can be manufactured according to the shape of the display panel, the shape of the casing of the display panel, and the like. “Flat part” means a part having an average curvature radius of more than 1000 mm, and “bent part” means a part having an average curvature radius of 1000 mm or less.
(表面粗さなど)
 カバー部材の薄肉部における第1の底面部、第2の底面部や、印刷層の第1の主面、第2の主面の粗さは前述のような算術平均粗さRaに限らない。例えば、二乗平均平方根粗さRqである場合、0.3nm以上100nm以下が好ましい。Rqが100nm以下であるとざらつきを感じにくくなり、Rqが0.3nm以上であるとガラス表面の摩擦係数が適度となり、指などのすべり性が向上する。最大高さ粗さRzである場合、0.5nm以上300nm以下が好ましい。Rzが300nm以下であるとざらつきを感じにくくなり、Rzが0.5nm以上であるとガラス表面の摩擦係数が適度となり、指などのすべり性が向上する。
(Surface roughness etc.)
The roughness of the first bottom surface portion, the second bottom surface portion, and the first main surface and the second main surface of the printed layer in the thin portion of the cover member is not limited to the arithmetic average roughness Ra as described above. For example, in the case of the root mean square roughness Rq, 0.3 nm or more and 100 nm or less is preferable. When Rq is 100 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rq is 0.3 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved. In the case of the maximum height roughness Rz, 0.5 nm or more and 300 nm or less is preferable. When Rz is 300 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rz is 0.5 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
 最大断面高さ粗さRtである場合、1nm以上500nm以下が好ましい。Rtが500nm以下であるとざらつきを感じにくくなり、Rtが1nm以上であるとガラス表面の摩擦係数が適度となり、指などのすべり性が向上する。最大山高さRpである場合、0.3nm以上500nm以下が好ましい。Rpが500nm以下であるとざらつきを感じにくくなり、Rpが0.3nm以上であるとガラス表面の摩擦係数が適度となり、指などのすべり性が向上する。最大谷深さ粗さRvである場合、0.3nm以上500nm以下が好ましい。Rvが500nm以下であるとざらつきを感じにくくなり、Rvが0.3nm以上であるとガラス表面の摩擦係数が適度となり、指などのすべり性が向上する。 In the case of the maximum section height roughness Rt, 1 nm or more and 500 nm or less are preferable. When Rt is 500 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rt is 1 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved. In the case of the maximum peak height Rp, 0.3 nm or more and 500 nm or less are preferable. When Rp is 500 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness. When Rp is 0.3 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved. In the case of the maximum valley depth roughness Rv, 0.3 nm or more and 500 nm or less are preferable. When Rv is 500 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rv is 0.3 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved.
 平均長さ粗さRsmである場合、0.3nm以上1000nm以下が好ましい。Rsmが1000nm以下であるとざらつきを感じにくくなり、Rsmが0.3nm以上であるとガラス表面の摩擦係数が適度となり、指などのすべり性が向上する。クルトシス粗さRkuである場合、1以上3以下が好ましい。Rkuが3以下であるとざらつきを感じにくくなり、Rkuが1以上であるとガラス表面の摩擦係数が適度となり、指などのすべり性が向上する。その他、Waなどのうねりでも表せ、粗さを表現するパラメータについては特に制限はない。スキューネス粗さRskが視認性、触感などの均一性の観点から-1以上1以下が好ましい。 In the case of the average length roughness Rsm, 0.3 nm to 1000 nm is preferable. When Rsm is 1000 nm or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness, and when Rsm is 0.3 nm or more, the friction coefficient of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved. When the kurtosis roughness is Rku, it is preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. When Rku is 3 or less, it becomes difficult to feel roughness. When Rku is 1 or more, the coefficient of friction of the glass surface becomes appropriate, and the slipperiness of a finger or the like is improved. In addition, there is no particular limitation on parameters that can be expressed by waviness such as Wa and express roughness. The skewness roughness Rsk is preferably −1 or more and 1 or less from the viewpoint of uniformity such as visibility and touch.
<用途>
 本発明のカバー部材の用途としては、特に限定されない。具体例としては、車両用透明部品(ヘッドライトカバー、サイドミラー、フロント透明基板、サイド透明基板、リア透明基板、インスツルメントパネル表面等。)、メータ、建築窓、ショーウインドウ、建築用内装部材、建築用外装部材、ディスプレイ(ノート型パソコン、モニタ、LCD、PDP、ELD、CRT、PDA等)、LCDカラーフィルタ、タッチパネル用基板、ピックアップレンズ、光学レンズ、眼鏡レンズ、カメラ部品、ビデオ部品、CCD用カバー基板、光ファイバ端面、プロジェクタ部品、複写機部品、太陽電池用透明基板(カバー部材等。)、携帯電話窓、バックライトユニット部品(導光板、冷陰極管等。)、バックライトユニット部品液晶輝度向上フィルム(プリズム、半透過フィルム等。)、液晶輝度向上フィルム、有機EL発光素子部品、無機EL発光素子部品、蛍光体発光素子部品、光学フィルタ、光学部品の端面、照明ランプ、照明器具のカバー、増幅レーザー光源、反射防止フィルム、偏光フィルム、農業用フィルム等が挙げられる。
<Application>
The use of the cover member of the present invention is not particularly limited. Specific examples include transparent parts for vehicles (headlight covers, side mirrors, front transparent boards, side transparent boards, rear transparent boards, instrument panel surfaces, etc.), meters, architectural windows, show windows, and architectural interior members. , Exterior materials for buildings, displays (notebook computers, monitors, LCDs, PDPs, ELDs, CRTs, PDAs, etc.), LCD color filters, touch panel substrates, pickup lenses, optical lenses, eyeglass lenses, camera parts, video parts, CCDs Cover substrates, optical fiber end faces, projector parts, copier parts, transparent substrates for solar cells (cover members, etc.), mobile phone windows, backlight unit parts (light guide plates, cold cathode tubes, etc.), backlight unit parts LCD brightness enhancement film (prism, transflective film, etc.), LCD brightness enhancement film Lum, organic EL light-emitting element parts, inorganic EL light-emitting element parts, phosphor light-emitting element parts, optical filters, end faces of optical parts, illumination lamps, lighting fixture covers, amplified laser light sources, antireflection films, polarizing films, agricultural films Etc.
<物品>
 本発明の物品は、前記カバー部材を備える。
 本発明の物品は、前記カバー部材からなるものでもよく、前記カバー部材以外の他の部材を更に備えるものでもよい。
 本発明の物品の例としては、前記でカバー部材の用途として挙げたもの、それらの何れか1種以上を備える装置、等が挙げられる。
 装置としては、例えば携帯情報端末、表示装置、照明装置、太陽電池モジュール等が挙げられる。
 本発明の物品は、凹部が得られセンシング感度や視認性が良好であり、携帯情報端末や表示装置に適している。また車載用として使用されるカバー部材には複数かつサイズの大きな凹部が求められ、センサを配置した場合には高いセンシング感度が求められる。さらに屈曲形状であるカバー部材に凹部が求められることもある。本発明はこれらの要求を満足できるカバー部材を提供できる。以上より本発明のカバー部材は車載用のカバー部材として適している。
<Article>
The article of the present invention includes the cover member.
The article of the present invention may be composed of the cover member, or may further include a member other than the cover member.
Examples of the article of the present invention include those mentioned above as applications of the cover member, and devices including any one or more of them.
Examples of the device include a portable information terminal, a display device, a lighting device, and a solar cell module.
The article of the present invention is suitable for a portable information terminal and a display device because a concave portion is obtained and sensing sensitivity and visibility are good. In addition, a plurality of large concave portions are required for a cover member used for in-vehicle use, and high sensing sensitivity is required when a sensor is arranged. Further, a concave portion may be required for the cover member having a bent shape. The present invention can provide a cover member that can satisfy these requirements. From the above, the cover member of the present invention is suitable as a vehicle-mounted cover member.
 本発明の物品が表示装置の場合、本発明の物品は、画像を表示する表示パネルと、表示装置本体の視認側に設けられた本発明のカバー部材とを具備する。
 表示パネルとしては、液晶パネル、有機EL(エレクトロルミネッセンス)パネル、プラズマディスプレイパネル等が挙げられる。カバー部材は、表示装置の保護板として、表示パネルに一体に設けられてもよく、表示パネルの第2の主面にタッチパネルセンサのようなセンサを配置、すなわちカバー部材とセンサとの間に表示パネルがある構造としてもよい。またカバー部材はセンサを介して、表示パネルの視認側に配置してもよい。
When the article of the present invention is a display device, the article of the present invention includes a display panel for displaying an image and a cover member of the present invention provided on the viewing side of the display device body.
Examples of the display panel include a liquid crystal panel, an organic EL (electroluminescence) panel, and a plasma display panel. The cover member may be provided integrally with the display panel as a protective plate of the display device, and a sensor such as a touch panel sensor is disposed on the second main surface of the display panel, that is, display is performed between the cover member and the sensor. It is good also as a structure with a panel. Moreover, you may arrange | position a cover member in the visual recognition side of a display panel via a sensor.
 本発明によれば、指紋認証用センサを組み込んだ場合に所望のセンシング能力を発揮可能なカバー部材、カバー部材を有する携帯情報端末又は表示装置、及びカバー部材を複数抜き出すためのガラス基板、並びに簡便なカバー部材及びガラス基板の製造方法を提供できる。 According to the present invention, when a fingerprint authentication sensor is incorporated, a cover member capable of exhibiting a desired sensing capability, a portable information terminal or display device having the cover member, a glass substrate for extracting a plurality of cover members, and simple Cover member and glass substrate manufacturing method can be provided.
 また、本出願は、2016年12月19日出願の日本特許出願2016-245540に基づくものであり、その内容はここに参照として取り込まれる。 This application is based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2016-245540 filed on Dec. 19, 2016, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 1…カバー部材、3,103…第1の主面、5,105…第2の主面、7,7A,7B,7C,7D,7G,7H,107…第1の凹部、8,8A,8B,8C,8D,8G,8H,108…第1の底面部、11,11A,11C,11H,111…第1の接続面部、14,14A,14B,14C,14D,14E,14F,14G,14H,114…第2の凹部、15,15A,15B,15C,15D,15E,15F,15G,15H,115…第2の底面部、18A,18B,18D,18E,18F,18H,118…第2の接続面部、21,21A,21B,21C,21D,21E,21F,21H,121…薄肉部、22,22A,22B,22C,22D,22E,22F,122…厚肉部、101…ガラス基板。 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Cover member 3,103 ... 1st main surface, 5,105 ... 2nd main surface, 7, 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7G, 7H, 107 ... 1st recessed part, 8, 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 8G, 8H, 108 ... first bottom surface portion, 11, 11A, 11C, 11H, 111 ... first connection surface portion, 14, 14A, 14B, 14C, 14D, 14E, 14F, 14G, 14H, 114 ... second recess, 15, 15A, 15B, 15C, 15D, 15E, 15F, 15G, 15H, 115 ... second bottom surface portion, 18A, 18B, 18D, 18E, 18F, 18H, 118 ... first 2 connection surface portions, 21, 21A, 21B, 21C, 21D, 21E, 21F, 21H, 121... Thin portions, 22, 22A, 22B, 22C, 22D, 22E, 22F, 122. .

Claims (18)

  1.  保護対象を保護するカバー部材であって、
     前記カバー部材の第1の主面には、第1の凹部が設けられ、
     第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置には、第2の凹部が設けられ、
     前記第1の凹部は、曲面状に形成された第1の底面部を備えていることを特徴とするカバー部材。
    A cover member for protecting a protection object,
    The first main surface of the cover member is provided with a first recess,
    A second recess is provided at a position corresponding to the first recess on the second main surface,
    The first concave portion includes a first bottom surface portion formed in a curved surface shape.
  2.  前記第1の底面部は、前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状であり、
     前記第1の凹部は、当該第1の凹部の開口縁と前記第1の底面部の外縁とを接続する第1の接続面部を備えている請求項1に記載のカバー部材。
    The first bottom surface portion is a curved surface protruding toward the first main surface side,
    The cover member according to claim 1, wherein the first recess includes a first connection surface portion that connects an opening edge of the first recess and an outer edge of the first bottom surface portion.
  3.  前記第1の底面部は、前記第2の主面側に突出する曲面状である請求項1に記載のカバー部材。 The cover member according to claim 1, wherein the first bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface side.
  4.  前記カバー部材の厚さ方向の断面視における前記第1の底面部の両端を結ぶ直線を第1の基準線L1、前記第1の基準線L1から最も離れた前記第1の底面部上の点を第1の点A1とした場合、
     前記第1の基準線L1から前記第1の点A1までの距離H1が5μm以上である請求項2又は3に記載のカバー部材。
    A straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a first reference line L1, a point on the first bottom surface that is farthest from the first reference line L1. Is the first point A1,
    The cover member according to claim 2 or 3, wherein a distance H1 from the first reference line L1 to the first point A1 is 5 µm or more.
  5.  前記カバー部材の厚さ方向の断面視における前記第1の底面部の両端を結ぶ直線を第1の基準線L1、前記第1の基準線L1から最も離れた前記第1の底面部上の点を第1の点A1、前記第2の凹部における前記第1の点A1に対応する点を対応点B2とした場合、
     前記第1の主面から前記第1の点A1までの深さJ1と前記第2の主面から前記対応点B2までの深さJ2との差の絶対値が0.1μm以上である請求項2から4のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材。
    A straight line connecting both ends of the first bottom surface in a cross-sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a first reference line L1, a point on the first bottom surface that is farthest from the first reference line L1. Is a first point A1, and a point corresponding to the first point A1 in the second recess is a corresponding point B2,
    An absolute value of a difference between a depth J1 from the first main surface to the first point A1 and a depth J2 from the second main surface to the corresponding point B2 is 0.1 µm or more. The cover member according to any one of 2 to 4.
  6.  前記第2の凹部における前記第1の底面部に対応する位置には、曲面状の第2の底面部が設けられている請求項1から4のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材。 The cover member according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein a curved second bottom surface portion is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion in the second recess.
  7.  前記第2の底面部は、前記第2の主面側に突出する曲面状であり、
     前記第2の凹部は、当該第2の凹部の開口縁と前記第2の底面部の外縁とを接続する第2の接続面部を備えている請求項6に記載のカバー部材。
    The second bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the second main surface side,
    The cover member according to claim 6, wherein the second recess includes a second connection surface portion that connects an opening edge of the second recess and an outer edge of the second bottom surface portion.
  8.  前記第2の底面部は、前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状である請求項6に記載のカバー部材。 The cover member according to claim 6, wherein the second bottom surface portion has a curved surface shape protruding toward the first main surface side.
  9.  前記カバー部材の厚さ方向の断面視における前記第2の底面部の両端を結ぶ直線を第2の基準線L2、前記第2の基準線L2から最も離れた前記第2の底面部上の点を第2の点A2とした場合、
     前記第2の基準線L2から前記第2の点A2までの距離H2が5μm以上である請求項7又は8に記載のカバー部材。
    A straight line connecting both ends of the second bottom surface portion in a sectional view in the thickness direction of the cover member is a second reference line L2, a point on the second bottom surface portion that is farthest from the second reference line L2. Is the second point A2,
    The cover member according to claim 7 or 8, wherein a distance H2 from the second reference line L2 to the second point A2 is 5 µm or more.
  10.  前記第2の凹部における前記第1の底面部に対応する位置には、前記第1の底面部と同じ方向に曲面状に突出する第2の底面部が形成され、当該第2の底面部と前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部が構成される請求項1から5のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材。 A second bottom surface portion protruding in a curved shape in the same direction as the first bottom surface portion is formed at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion in the second recess, and the second bottom surface portion The cover member according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein a thin portion is configured by a region sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion.
  11.  前記カバー部材の平面視において前記第1の凹部が前記第2の凹部と重なる請求項1から10のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材。 The cover member according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the first recess overlaps the second recess in a plan view of the cover member.
  12.  前記カバー部材の平面視における前記第1の凹部の重心位置と前記第2の凹部の重心位置との距離が100μm以下である請求項1から11のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材。 The cover member according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein a distance between a gravity center position of the first recess and a gravity center position of the second recess in a plan view of the cover member is 100 µm or less.
  13.  前記第1の主面および前記第2の主面におけるカリウムイオン濃度が前記カバー部材の厚さ方向中央におけるカリウムイオン濃度よりも高い請求項1から12のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材。 The cover member according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein a potassium ion concentration on the first main surface and the second main surface is higher than a potassium ion concentration at a thickness direction center of the cover member.
  14.  前記保護対象は、携帯情報端末である請求項1から13のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材。 The cover member according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein the protection target is a portable information terminal.
  15.  請求項1から14のいずれか一項に記載のカバー部材を有する携帯情報端末。 A portable information terminal having the cover member according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
  16.  保護対象を保護するカバー部材をガラス基板から製造するカバー部材の製造方法であって、
     前記ガラス基板の第1の主面に第1の凹部を形成するとともに、第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置に第2の凹部を形成し、
     前記第1の凹部および前記第2の凹部が形成された前記ガラス基板を化学強化し、
     前記凹部を形成する際に、前記第1の凹部が、平面状の第1の底面部を備え、前記第2の凹部が、前記第1の底面部に対応する位置に設けられ、前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部を構成する平面状の第2の底面部を備え、平面視において前記第1の凹部が前記第2の凹部と重なるように処理を行うことを特徴とするカバー部材の製造方法。
    A cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member for protecting a protection object from a glass substrate,
    Forming a first recess in the first main surface of the glass substrate, and forming a second recess in a position corresponding to the first recess in the second main surface;
    Chemically strengthening the glass substrate on which the first recess and the second recess are formed;
    When forming the concave portion, the first concave portion includes a planar first bottom surface portion, and the second concave portion is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion. A planar second bottom surface portion that constitutes a thin portion by a region sandwiched between the bottom surface portion and the first recess is overlapped with the second recess in a plan view. The manufacturing method of the cover member to do.
  17.  保護対象を保護するカバー部材をガラス基板から製造するカバー部材の製造方法であって、
     前記ガラス基板の第1の主面に第1の凹部を形成するとともに、第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置に第2の凹部を形成し、
     前記第1の凹部および前記第2の凹部が形成された前記ガラス基板を化学強化し、
     前記凹部を形成する際に、前記第1の凹部が、平面状の第1の底面部と、前記第1の凹部の開口縁と前記第1の底面部の外縁とを接続する第1の接続面部とを備え、前記第2の凹部が、前記第1の底面部に対応する位置に設けられ、前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部を構成する平面状の第2の底面部と、前記第2の凹部の開口縁と前記第2の底面部の外縁とを接続する第2の接続面部とを備え、前記第1の底面部の深さと前記第2の底面部の深さとが異なるように処理を行うことを特徴とするカバー部材の製造方法。
    A cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member for protecting a protection object from a glass substrate,
    Forming a first recess in the first main surface of the glass substrate, and forming a second recess in a position corresponding to the first recess in the second main surface;
    Chemically strengthening the glass substrate on which the first recess and the second recess are formed;
    When forming the recess, the first recess connects the planar first bottom surface portion, the opening edge of the first recess, and the outer edge of the first bottom surface portion. A planar second bottom surface that is formed by a region sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion and the second recess is provided at a position corresponding to the first bottom surface portion. And a second connection surface portion that connects the opening edge of the second recess and the outer edge of the second bottom surface portion, the depth of the first bottom surface portion and the depth of the second bottom surface portion. A process for producing a cover member, wherein the treatment is performed so as to be different.
  18.  保護対象を保護するカバー部材をガラス基板から製造するカバー部材の製造方法であって、
     前記ガラス基板の第1の主面に第1の凹部を形成するとともに、第2の主面における前記第1の凹部に対応する位置に第2の凹部を形成し、
     前記凹部を形成する際に、前記第1の凹部が、前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状の第1の底面部を備え、前記第2の凹部が、前記第1の底面部に対応する位置において前記第1の主面側に突出する曲面状に形成し、前記第1の底面部とで挟まれる領域により薄肉部を構成する第2の底面部を備えるように処理を行うことを特徴とするカバー部材の製造方法。
    A cover member manufacturing method for manufacturing a cover member for protecting a protection object from a glass substrate,
    Forming a first recess in the first main surface of the glass substrate, and forming a second recess in a position corresponding to the first recess in the second main surface;
    When forming the recess, the first recess includes a curved first bottom surface protruding toward the first main surface, and the second recess is formed on the first bottom surface. Forming a curved surface projecting toward the first main surface at a corresponding position, and performing processing so as to include a second bottom surface portion that forms a thin portion by a region sandwiched between the first bottom surface portion. The manufacturing method of the cover member characterized by these.
PCT/JP2017/045104 2016-12-19 2017-12-15 Cover member, manufacturing method therefor, and mobile information terminal WO2018116981A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016245540A JP2020024477A (en) 2016-12-19 2016-12-19 Cover member, manufacturing method thereof and mobile information terminal
JP2016-245540 2016-12-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018116981A1 true WO2018116981A1 (en) 2018-06-28

Family

ID=62626532

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/045104 WO2018116981A1 (en) 2016-12-19 2017-12-15 Cover member, manufacturing method therefor, and mobile information terminal

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2020024477A (en)
WO (1) WO2018116981A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110225169A (en) * 2019-07-23 2019-09-10 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Shell and terminal device
JP2019194142A (en) * 2018-04-27 2019-11-07 Agc株式会社 Chemically reinforced glass sheet, portable information terminal, and manufacturing method of chemically reinforced glass sheet
US20210230057A1 (en) * 2017-11-30 2021-07-29 Corning Incorporated Method of increasing iox processability on glass articles with multiple thicknesses
CN113998898A (en) * 2020-07-28 2022-02-01 Agc株式会社 Glass member
TWI756981B (en) * 2020-12-11 2022-03-01 大陸商寶宸(廈門)光學科技有限公司 Protective cover, touch panel and method of manufacturing the touch panel
WO2022115553A1 (en) * 2020-11-30 2022-06-02 Corning Incorporated Textured glass-based articles with multiple haze levels and processes of producing the same
EP3998242A4 (en) * 2019-07-10 2023-08-09 Agc Inc. Glass substrate, cover glass, assembly, assembly manufacturing method, in-vehicle display device, and in-vehicle display device manufacturing method
EP4026814A4 (en) * 2019-09-03 2023-10-25 Agc Inc. Glass substrate unit, cover glass assembly, and vehicle-mounted display device

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022054645A1 (en) * 2020-09-14 2022-03-17 大日本印刷株式会社 Matte article

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150371076A1 (en) * 2014-06-18 2015-12-24 Tpk Touch Solutions (Xiamen) Inc. Touch panel with function of fingerprint identification
US20160224822A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-08-04 Asahi Glass Company, Limited Cover member, personal digital assistant and display device including the same, and method of manufacturing cover glass
US20160357294A1 (en) * 2015-06-05 2016-12-08 Asahi Glass Company, Limited Glass substrate and method for manufacturing the same, cover glass and method for manufacturing the same, personal digital assistant, and display device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150371076A1 (en) * 2014-06-18 2015-12-24 Tpk Touch Solutions (Xiamen) Inc. Touch panel with function of fingerprint identification
US20160224822A1 (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-08-04 Asahi Glass Company, Limited Cover member, personal digital assistant and display device including the same, and method of manufacturing cover glass
US20160357294A1 (en) * 2015-06-05 2016-12-08 Asahi Glass Company, Limited Glass substrate and method for manufacturing the same, cover glass and method for manufacturing the same, personal digital assistant, and display device

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210230057A1 (en) * 2017-11-30 2021-07-29 Corning Incorporated Method of increasing iox processability on glass articles with multiple thicknesses
JP2019194142A (en) * 2018-04-27 2019-11-07 Agc株式会社 Chemically reinforced glass sheet, portable information terminal, and manufacturing method of chemically reinforced glass sheet
JP7006534B2 (en) 2018-04-27 2022-02-10 Agc株式会社 Manufacturing method of chemically strengthened glass plate, mobile information terminal and chemically strengthened glass plate
EP3998242A4 (en) * 2019-07-10 2023-08-09 Agc Inc. Glass substrate, cover glass, assembly, assembly manufacturing method, in-vehicle display device, and in-vehicle display device manufacturing method
CN110225169A (en) * 2019-07-23 2019-09-10 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Shell and terminal device
EP4026814A4 (en) * 2019-09-03 2023-10-25 Agc Inc. Glass substrate unit, cover glass assembly, and vehicle-mounted display device
CN113998898A (en) * 2020-07-28 2022-02-01 Agc株式会社 Glass member
WO2022115553A1 (en) * 2020-11-30 2022-06-02 Corning Incorporated Textured glass-based articles with multiple haze levels and processes of producing the same
TWI756981B (en) * 2020-12-11 2022-03-01 大陸商寶宸(廈門)光學科技有限公司 Protective cover, touch panel and method of manufacturing the touch panel

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2020024477A (en) 2020-02-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7092137B2 (en) Cover members and mobile information terminals
JP6759712B2 (en) Cover glass and display device equipped with it
WO2018116981A1 (en) Cover member, manufacturing method therefor, and mobile information terminal
CN206143062U (en) Protection glass and key fob
JP7155582B2 (en) Method for manufacturing opening member, method for manufacturing processed member, and plate-like member
TWI708072B (en) Enclosures having an improved tactile surface
JP5878562B2 (en) Cover glass for electronic equipment, manufacturing method thereof, and touch sensor module for electronic equipment
JP6583007B2 (en) Cover member, portable information terminal and display device having the same, and method of manufacturing cover glass
US20130169591A1 (en) Strengthened glass block, touch-sensitive display device and oled display device
TW201637857A (en) Curved cover glass and method for manufacturing same, and glass member, display device, and curved glass
JP2018067709A (en) Electronic device structure and ultra-thin glass sheet used therein
JP2017001902A (en) Cover glass and portable information terminal having the same, and method for producing cover glass
KR102389697B1 (en) Curved Tempered Glass, Curved Tempered Glass Film And Method For Manufacturing The Same
KR20170033209A (en) Curved Tempered Glass And Method For Manufacturing The Same
KR102521878B1 (en) Curved Tempered Glass And Method For Manufacturing The Same
WO2015056690A1 (en) Touch panel, and display-device-fitted touch panel
JP2015197784A (en) Cover glass integrated type touch panel sensor substrate and display device
JP2020028973A (en) Plate with printing layer, cover member, and display device
JP6153620B2 (en) Cover glass for electronic equipment and manufacturing method thereof
KR20140142533A (en) Touch panel and method of manufacturing the same
JP2019155636A (en) Laminate, package body and display
CN113950713B (en) Glass substrate
CN114527592A (en) Electronic device and method for manufacturing the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17883924

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17883924

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP